JP6718851B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

When a certain condition is established, if at least one of the effect symbol and the identification symbol displayed on the display means moves toward the other and the integration of the two is established, the result of the determination whether or not the identification symbol corresponds There has been proposed a game machine that executes a notice effect set so that the possibility of winning is increased (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-200630, A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the notice effect is monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
Specific display means (for example, a starting winning memory display area 5H, a changing special figure display area 5I, etc.) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display, etc.) relating to the variable display,
Action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by causing the effect image to act on the specific display (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps S709, S711, and S172). When,
A special display means for performing a special display capable of changing the display mode step by step in accordance with the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a special display production),
A special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
It said working effect execution unit, in accordance with the display position of the a working effect of execution target the specific display, from among the starting position of the working effect that there exist a plurality of display of the specific display on which to perform the action effect Set it so that it is more likely to be far from the position closer to the position (for example, FIGS. 21 and 23),
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, the icon as the special display should be displayed. The special display change notification for notifying is displayed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed (the special display changes, etc.),
The special notification executing unit, said that the icon as the Ru executable der special notification (e.g. special displayed in a special display subsequent predetermined period display form to be changed is informed of are displayed It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after the notification)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, interest is improved. Further, it is possible to grasp the game situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The start position of the action effect is a first position (for example, the lower left of the image display device 5), and a second position (for example, the lower right of the image display device 5) that is farther than the first position with respect to the specific display, Therefore, the start position of the action effect may be set to the second position more easily than the first position.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the effect and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
It is possible to control in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state),
The action effect executing means is capable of executing the action effect in a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is controlled after the advantageous state ends (for example, if Yes is determined in step S708, the process of step S709 is performed). May be performed).
With such a configuration, interest is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The action effect for the specific display farthest from the second position (for example, the hold display of the hold display number 1) has an execution start timing earlier than that for the other effect. Good.
With such a configuration, interest is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
In the action effect targeting the specific display farthest from the second position (for example, the hold display of the hold display number 1), the effect image acts on the specific display more than in the action effect targeting another specific display. The timing may be early.
With such a configuration, interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
As the display mode of the specific display, there are a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (for example, blue, green, red) that can be changed from the normal mode by the execution of the action effect,
When displaying a specific display (for example, the hold display of the hold display number 4) that is not the execution target of the action effect, the specific display may be displayed in the special mode.
With such a configuration, interest is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific display includes a hold display corresponding to the variable display before execution, and a running display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed,
The action effect executing means is capable of executing a special action effect as the action effect targeting the in-execution display,
The start position of the special effect may be different from the start position of the special effect (for example, FIG. 23D).
With such a configuration, interest is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
It has a movable object (for example, role object 200) that performs a predetermined operation, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state),
An action effecting means capable of executing an action effect of causing the movable object to move to a position covering at least a part of a specific display area (for example, a start winning prize memory display area 5H, a changing special figure display area 5I) in which the specific display is displayed. When,
Change effecting means capable of executing change effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state by changing the display mode of the specific display,
A suggestion production means capable of executing a suggestion production that suggests whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes over a predetermined period before the execution of the change production,
When performing the action effect during the predetermined period, the action effecting means operates the movable object so as not to receive the specific display at least when the change effect is performed (for example, FIG. 24). May be.
With such a configuration, even when the movable object can move to a position that covers at least a part of the specific display area, the movable object moves to a position that does not cover the specific display when the change effect is executed. Therefore, the player can promptly confirm the change mode of the specific display. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The display mode of the effect image may be changeable (for example, FIG. 25) in the period from the time when the effect image is displayed until the action effect is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the effect production.

Further, modes for carrying out the invention described below include the following gaming machines (10) to (18). Conventionally, as a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and a game medium is won in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is set. When established, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as “display symbol”) is variably displayed on a variably display device, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined game value is given based on the display result, a so-called variably display game. There is a pachinko machine that enhances the interest of the game. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has been in the jackpot game state has a special electric winning device called a special winning opening or attacker in an open state, which makes it extremely easy to win a game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, various types of effects that make the player expect the display result to be a specific display mode are executed before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device. As such a gaming machine, a display mode of a specific display is changed by displaying a plurality of images as a specific display and then combining the plurality of images, as disclosed in JP-A-2005-160056. There is known a gaming machine that notifies the user and executes an effect that changes the display mode of the specific display. However, in such a gaming machine, if the information about the game is not notified during a predetermined period after the player recognizes that the display mode of the specific display is changed, the game situation cannot be grasped, and the interest of the game is deteriorated. There is a risk that In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game.

(10) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A special display means for performing a special display capable of changing the display mode step by step in accordance with the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a special display production),
A special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, when the icon as the special display is displayed). Notification of special display change is continuously issued for a predetermined period, and then an icon is displayed (special display changes, etc.),
The special notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after that),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the game situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above,
Further provided is a special effect executing means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that executes a pseudo-interconnection effect) capable of executing a special effect that performs either a success effect or a failure effect after performing a common introduction effect.
The special display means can change the display mode of the special display when the effect result of the predetermined effect is a specific result (for example, when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success, an icon as a special display is displayed. Such),
The special effect executing means is configured to execute the successful effect at a high rate in a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is shown to be a specific result to when the display mode of the special display changes. Executing a special effect (for example, determining a timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(12) In the gaming machine of (10) or (11) above,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display stepwise by displaying different types of special images stepwise (for example, when a plurality of special display effects are performed, they are displayed stepwise. Icons increase),
Depending on the combination of the displayed special images, any one of a plurality of types of effects whose ratios are controlled to the advantageous state are executed at different ratios (for example, an icon (combination of icons) to be displayed is variably displayed. Depending on the result, it will be decided in different proportions)
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be paid to which special image is displayed.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (11) or (12) above,
There are a plurality of start timings of the predetermined effect, and the ratio of the effect result of the predetermined effect to the specific result varies depending on which timing the start timing of the predetermined effect is (for example, depending on the execution timing of the predetermined effect). The ratio of the success of the specified result is different)
You may do it.
With such a configuration, the player's attention can be paid to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (13) above,
Corresponding display means for performing correspondence display corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing active display),
A corresponding display changing means for changing the display mode of the corresponding display (a CPU 90120 for effect control for performing an active display change effect),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on the combination of the display mode of the corresponding display and the display mode of the special display (for example, the display mode of the active display and the display mode of the special display (the number and combination of icons)). The ratio of the variable display result being a "big hit" differs depending on the combination of
You may do it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect.

(15) In the gaming machine described in any one of (10) to (14) above,
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect for notifying the degree of advantage (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing reach effect of super reach),
A special change effect executing means capable of executing a special change effect for changing the display mode of the special display when the specific effect is executed (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the special change effect), Further preparation,
The special change effect executing means is capable of executing the special change effect in a mode prioritizing the specific effect (for example, interrupting the super reach effect and executing the special change effect).
You may do it.
With such a configuration, the special display mode can be changed in a mode that has priority over the specific effect, so that the change in the special display mode can be noticed even when the specific effect is executed.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (15) above,
A plurality of selection candidates are provided, and a selection unit capable of selecting any of the presented selection candidates (for example, a production control CPU 90120 that executes a race production as a predetermined production) is provided,
The plurality of selection candidates include a first selection candidate and a second selection candidate having a higher advantage than the first candidate when selected (for example, the success expectation as a result of a predetermined effect is compared. Selection candidates that belong to the first group that are relatively low, and selection candidates that belong to the second group that have relatively high success expectations as the result of the predetermined effect).
When the first selection candidate is not included in the presented plurality of selection candidates, the selection unit is configured to select any of the plurality of selection candidates at a higher rate than when the presented plurality of selection candidates are included in the first selection candidate. Not selected (for example, the second cancellation rate is set higher than the first cancellation rate),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(17) In the gaming machine described in any one of (10) to (16) above,
The special notification executing means is capable of executing an abnormal display as the special notification based on the abnormality determination being performed, and in the predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed. It is possible to start the abnormality display even when an abnormality determination is made (for example, it is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after being notified that the icon as the special display is displayed),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the error.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (17) above,
The special notification execution means can update the display of the number of coins won as the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, the icon as the special display is It is possible to update the number of coins won even within a predetermined period after being notified that it will be displayed),
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform the notification of the number of acquired balls.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example etc of contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value for games counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for effect control. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of specific display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific display change pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination rate of action effect execution presence or absence. It is a figure showing a list of action production control patterns. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of action production. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of action production. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|operation production of the action production of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|operation production of the action production of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting winning determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stop process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special display production execution setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a special display production execution decision table and a special display production execution mode decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an execution timing determination table. It is a timing chart showing the details of the special display effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of special display production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production execution setting processing. It is the figure which shows the constitution example of the announcement production execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the execution timing determination table referred in order to determine the execution timing of a notice production. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when the special display production and the failure production are executed. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when the special display production and the success production are executed. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when the special display production and the notice production are executed. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 50. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the player makes effect settings at the timing “X” shown in FIG. 50. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when the race production is done as specified production. In the case where the special display effect is performed, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the display mode of the first stage, and the active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first mode according to the change of the meter display is executed. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. The example of production operation when the super reach production is independently executed is shown. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when special display production and active display change production are executed when super reach production is executed. It is the figure which shows the production operation example when specific display production and active display change production are executed when super reach production is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a display mode in the case of setting the function of an auto button valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by a long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an auto button function.

Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven into it.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode), etc., and are identified in the special symbol game which is an example of the variable display game. Special symbols (also called “special symbols”) that are possible plural types of identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variably displayed). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

Symbol numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of types of special symbols are attached. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, respectively, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Below, the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". ..

Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, the numbers indicating "0" to "9" and the symbol indicating "-"), or the types may be different. May be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be respectively configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. In the decorative pattern display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, for example, decorative patterns which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, The variation (for example, vertical scroll display) of the decorative pattern is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The fixed decorative design (final stop design) that is the variable display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, or a special special figure using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the drawing game, a plurality of types of distinguishable decorative patterns that can be respectively identified are variably displayed, and the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means terminating the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbol in a stop display (also called a complete stop display or a final stop display). .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The design may be displayed in a stopped state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion/contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern completely in a stopped state for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction.

The decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). It may be a number, an alphabetic character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the decorative designs. For example, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a combination causing a loss can be configured.

After the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow from top to bottom in order from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative pattern with the largest symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, The decorative design with the smallest design number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the symbol number that is larger to the symbol number that is smaller, When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning a prize memory display area 5H is arranged. In the starting winning a prize memory display area 5H, a hold memory display (hold display) is displayed which allows the variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game to be specified. Here, in the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special drawing game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is generated based on the winning prize for starting by entering. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special drawing game and the variable display of the decorative pattern is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. If the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the established starting condition is suspended. Done. The reserved memory display in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is generated based on the starting winning prize caused by the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning prize hole, or the second starting winning prize hole is displayed by the gaming ball. The display mode (for example, display color or shape) may be changed depending on whether or not the start winning is caused by passing (entering).

In the display area of the image display device 5, a changing special figure display area 5I is provided on the left side of the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. In the changing special figure display area 5I, an image corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed. The display corresponding to the currently executed variable display is also referred to as an in-execution display, an active display, a variable display corresponding display, or the like. The running display and the pending storage display are collectively referred to as a specific display. While the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is being executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning hole, it is executed in a circular special figure display area 5I. Medium display is displayed. Further, while the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is being executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening, it is circular in the changing symbol display area 5I. The running display is displayed. That is, when the first or second start condition is satisfied, the display removed from the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is shifted and displayed in the changing special figure display area 5I. Even if the player can grasp which of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B the special symbol game is executed by the display of the changing special symbol display area 5I. Good. Note that the size and shape may be different between the hold storage display and the in-execution display.

In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning a prize memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold storage number in a specifiable manner at the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display device 25A and a second hold display device 25B are provided. The first reserved indicator 25A displays the number of the first special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of storages in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending. The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually means a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages, and the total number of reservation storages. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included, but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. Although the normal variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even in the normally open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning hole by closing the second starting winning hole in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and in a normally opened state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the game balls being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the playing balls being detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific area is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a big prize hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when you pass (enter). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary pattern (also referred to as "general drawing" or "normal drawing") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also called "normal figure game").

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure reservation display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reservations as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operating stick). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the central position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. The photo sensor may be included.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, such that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display device 20. After the universal figure starting condition for is satisfied, the ordinary symbol display device 20 is based on the establishment of the universal figure starting condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol, for example, that the previous universal figure game is finished. The public figure game by is started.

In this public figure game, after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when a predetermined time which is the general figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is “ordinary symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended. In addition, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. After that, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special figure game or the big hit game state.

In the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol The finalized special symbol (result of special symbol display) that is the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit as a specific game state (advantageous state, specific state) in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times Controlled to the gaming state. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2” are the small hit symbols. , The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, the special symbols common to both special symbol games may be the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has a predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

The special winning a prize opening device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closing the special winning a prize, the special award winning prize opening device having the special award winning entrance opened during the execution of the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball has not been won in the special winning opening). ..

Of the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "7" are usually open round big hit symbols and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the special opening game, the special opening winning jackpot of the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 in the jackpot gaming state (normal opening jackpot state) as the normal opening round specific game state that is controlled after the jackpot symbol is released. The door opens the special winning opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big-hit symbol is derived. In the big-hit gaming state (short-term open big-hit state) as a specific game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is used in each round. The upper limit time (upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) for changing to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, is shorter than the first period in the normally open big hit state (for example, 0 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-time open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open big hit state, if a game ball wins the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which a payout (prize ball) is practically not obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

In addition, the big hit game state as a short-term open round specific game state is not limited to one in which the period of opening the special winning opening is shorter than that of the big hit game state as the normal opening round specific playing state. For example, opening of the special winning opening. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that the special winning opening is in the open state is It may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period during which the big winning opening is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also shorter, and the number of times the round is executed is at least one of the second round number that is smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. ..

After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, as in the short-term open big hitting state, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, the variable winning operation for changing the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is performed. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, in response to the start of any special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

Here, the reach state is a decorative pattern which is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation pattern”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative patterns are changing in synchronization while forming all or part of the big hit combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), in advance. The remaining decorative pattern display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern showing alphanumeric characters "7") that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the display state in which the decorative pattern is changing in the pattern display area 5C or the like, or in the whole or part of the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative pattern is a big hit. It is a display state in which all or a part of the combination is formed and is changing in synchronization.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a performance effect different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach production display (or simply reach production). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 are put in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, the possibility of becoming a “big hit” (also called “reliability” or “big hit reliability”) is different in each reach mode. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And when the reach mode of super reach such as super reach α or super reach β appears, the variable display result may be “big hit”, compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (big hit expectation degree) Becomes higher.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be the reach state, the variable display result may be a "big hit", etc. A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed by a variable display mode of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-run" can be executed. Whether or not the variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-link” is to be executed should be determined in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is executed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the temporary design display area. By changing the decorative pattern again in the decorative pattern display area (for example, either or both of the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R), the display is stopped. The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. In this way, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number is displayed. By performing the variable display for the decorative pattern again, when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative pattern forming the non-reach combination is not stopped and the stop state is displayed. is there.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable display is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once. Before the resulting final decorative design is derived and displayed, after temporarily displaying the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, The effect display in which the decorative patterns are changed (pseudo continuous fluctuation) again in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the "Left", "Middle", "Right" decorative pattern display, excluding the initial fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the first temporary stop of all decorative patterns. This is the number of times the decorative pattern is changed again in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-run chances The decorative pattern forming the is temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result. After that, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariable display) is performed. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-repeating", the pseudo-repeating fluctuation (re-changing) is performed once to three times so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. Based on this, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be displayed as if it was started two to four times in a row. It should be noted that the number of pseudo-repeated fluctuations (re-fluctuations) in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" may be performed more than once to three times, such as four times or five times.

As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, in addition to “slip” and “pseudo-relation”, for example, “developing opportunity eye”, “developing opportunity eye end”, “chance eye stop slip” Various effect operations such as the above may be executed. Here, in the variable display production of "development opportunity eye", from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, "left", "middle", "right" In all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns forming the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the variable display state of the decorative patterns is reached. As a predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative pattern forming the development opportunity is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" after the reach state. Expectations are increased.

Further, in the variable display effect of "end of development opportunity", after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, all of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are displayed. The effect display for deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as the development opportunity item as the fixed decorative pattern is performed. In the variable display effect of "slip after opportunity stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started until the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative patterns of the miss combination (special combination) to be the pseudo consecutive chance, in all, Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" in which the decorative pattern is changed again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative pattern is changed again in a part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. By doing so, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

Unlike the reach effect or variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-relation" during variable display of the decorative pattern, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, image display or voice output as a message, lamp There is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state due to a production operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative pattern such as lighting, or the reach production by the super reach may be executed. That is, a notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that the variable display result may be a “big hit”. The demonstration operation that is the notice production is the variable display state of the decorative pattern after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R). Further, the notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include what is executed after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state.

The notice production includes a look-ahead notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice). The pre-reading notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed based on the pending information of the special drawing game before starting the variable display that is the target of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit". is there. In particular, the look-ahead notice production that continuously announces the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" over the variable display of decorative designs that are executed multiple times corresponding to multiple special drawing games is a continuous notice production. Also called.

As a look-ahead notice effect, a variable display to be noticed is changed by changing the hold memory display that allows the number of special figure hold memories to be specified in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H to be a display mode different from the display mode in normal time. In, a hold display notice may be executed to give a notice of the possibility of a “big hit”. For example, a hold display notice may be executed to display the hold storage display in the starting winning prize storage display area 5H in a special mode different from the normal display mode at a predetermined timing.

In addition to the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the prefetching notice effect may be executed in the changing special map display area 5I. In this embodiment, the pending storage display removed from the starting winning award storage display area 5H in response to the completion of the suspension is shifted and displayed in the changing special figure display area 5I. When the reserved memory display is made in the special mode in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, when shifting to the changing special map display area 5I, the running display in the changing special map display area 5I is also the special mode. You may do so. By doing so, even when the look-ahead notice effect is executed at a stage where the number of reserved memories is small, it is possible to increase the chances of changing the display mode to the special mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to such a prefetching notice effect, when the variable display is executed, the variable display result is a “big hit” based on the variation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result. A changing notice production is performed so that the possibility that it will be announced will be announced. The fluctuating notice effect may be any one that gives a notice of the possibility of a “big hit” by displaying an effect image, outputting a sound, lighting a lamp, operating a performance effect, or a combination thereof.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also called “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is the lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or without the reach effect, the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed or without reach effect, a predetermined normal jackpot combination (``non-certain variation jackpot combination (Also referred to as “”) is displayed in a stopped manner. The fixed decorative pattern that is usually a combination of big hits is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 is “1”. ~ Among the decorative patterns of "8", any one of the decorative patterns having the even number "2", "4", "6", "8" is "left", "middle", "right" It suffices that the display is stopped and displayed in line on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Ordinary symbols having symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” that make up the normal jackpot combination are called normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special drawing game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is called a variable display mode (also called “big hit type”) of “indeterminate change” (also called “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after turning on the power). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In the time saving control, one of the condition that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that the variable display result is “jackpot” is established first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after the same reach effect as in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is "normal" is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a combination of a plurality of jackpots Among them, the fixed decorative design which is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative design which is the probability variation big hit combination, for example, the design number which is variably displayed in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the image display device 5 is "1". ~ Of the decorative patterns of "8", any one of the decorative patterns having the odd number "1", "3", "5", "7" is "left", "middle", "right" It suffices that the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. The decorative symbols having odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” that constitute the probability variation big hit combination are called probability variation patterns. When the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the fixed decorative symbol which is usually the big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol.

Regardless of whether the fixed decorative design is a normal big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game is a "big hit" variable display result. In this case, it is referred to as a variable display mode of "probability change" (also referred to as "big hit type"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after that, probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) is a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be finished when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled again after the big hit game state ends. Like the time saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when "probability variation falling" is determined to end the probability variation control in the probability variation falling lottery that is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Good.

When the time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular symbol game (normal symbol variation time) by the regular symbol display device 20 than in the normal state, and the variable of the regular symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result is "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port along with the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second starting winning opening being in the expanded opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a normal state or a low base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a “probability variation state” in particular, and may be referred to as a time saving probability variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate low base state. On the other hand, the certainty variation state in which only the certainty variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed (highly accurate low base state) is sometimes referred to as the no time saving certainty variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time saving control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low accurate low base state. When at least one of time saving control and probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game can be frequently executed, and the probability that the variable display result in each special figure game is a "big hit" As a result of being increased, the player is in an advantageous state. A game state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot game state is also called a special game state (special state).

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of fixed decorative designs determined in advance as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Also, as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After that, the fixed decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern which becomes a chance eye corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

In response to the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becoming a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "sudden big hit" or "sudden probability big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the time variation control and the probability variation control may be performed.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed, and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the state before the small hit. However, if the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed and the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit game state ends, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

When the special winning design that constitutes the opening chance eye is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative design, and the special winning opening is opened, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" There are times when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state based on that, and when it is controlled to a small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". On the other hand, the reason why the special winning opening is opened after the fixed decorative pattern forming the reach combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative pattern is that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" Only when it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state based on this. Therefore, the fixed decorative pattern constituting the opening chance eye corresponds to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit game state, while the fixed decorative pattern of the reach combination is the short-term open big hit state. It corresponds to being controlled by.

The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is the non-probable-variable big-hit combination or the probable-variable big-hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are usually the jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “left” , "Middle", "Right" in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R is changed again in the state that the same decorative pattern is complete, and a decorative pattern (probably variable pattern) that is a probability variation big hit combination, and a normal jackpot Any of the decorative patterns (normal patterns) to be combined is stopped and displayed as the final decorative pattern (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", as the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol that is usually the jackpot combination is re-varied after the ornamental symbols displayed in the temporary stop are changed again. A re-lottery drawing effect is displayed in which the display is derived. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "probability variation", as the re-lottery effect, the ornamental symbols that have been temporarily stopped and displayed are re-varied, and the definite variation jackpot combination is set. The re-lottery winning effect that displays symbols as a stop may be executed, or the re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

After the fixed decorative design which is usually a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one round ends in the big hit game state at the start of the big hit game state or during the round in the big hit game state During the big hit, which is a certainty change notification production of whether to control to the certainty change state during the period from the end of the last round in the big hit game state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. Promotion production may be executed. The notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the jackpot gaming state is over. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

In the big hit middle promotion effect, even though the fixed decorative pattern is usually a big hit combination, there is a big hit middle promotion success effect that notifies that there is a promotion that the game state is a probable change state, and that there is no promotion that is a probable change state. There is a promotion failure promotion during the big hit to inform. For example, in the jackpot mid-elevation effect, the decorative design is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal design or the probability variation design is stopped and displayed as the performance display result, or the decorative design is variably displayed. By displaying different effect images, it is sufficient to notify the player of the presence or absence of promotion in a probable state so that the player can recognize.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly intended for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to the hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11, the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that configures the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/lighting/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 which receives detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and outputs the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electric parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 effects all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the lighting/extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It is provided with a function for determining the control content for causing the electric component for use to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is installed.

As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main substrate 11. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. Anything you have is acceptable. Further, on the main substrate 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. Also, a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like is included.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. It is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, a determination result (preliminary determination result) whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit” and the variable display result is “big hit”. ”, different EXT data is set in accordance with the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “indeterminate change” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designating command corresponding to the game state (low accurate low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is used for the time saving control. On the other hand, the second gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (low certainty high base state, time saving state) in which the probability variation control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is the third gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high-probability low base state, no time saving certain variation state) in which the time variation control is performed while the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9503H is the time variation control and certain variation. It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability high-base state, time-shortening probability variation state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round has been executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term opening jackpot state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , Is a first start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on the second special symbol display device 4B, the second start opening winning award designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number such that it can be specified in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified in the starting winning prize storage display area 5H or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command correspond to that the execution of the special figure game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. It may be transmitted after being transmitted.

The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the first special figure reserved memory number when the first starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first starting prize. In addition, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the second special figure reserved memory number when the second starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second starting prize.

In this embodiment, a first start winning combination designation command and a second starting winning combination designating command for designating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has won a start is transmitted as the reserved storage information. At the same time, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command that specify the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages addition designation command (first reserved storage count addition designation command or second designation (Reserved storage number addition designation command), while the number of reserved storages decreases, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first It is also possible to send a 1-holding storage number subtraction designation command or a second holding storage number subtraction designation command).

Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" as a result of winning determination, and whether or not it is a big hit type. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating, as a winning determination result, a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type falls within.

In this embodiment, in the random number determination process at the time of winning (see FIG. 14), whether the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" is determined based on the occurrence of the start winning. Whether or not, the determination range of the random number value MR3 for determining the type of jackpot and the variation pattern type is determined. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating that the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" and a value designating the big hit type are set, and the effect control board 12 is set. Control to send. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value that includes the random number value MR3 as the determination result, and control is performed to transmit it to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the big hit type. In addition to being recognizable, the variation pattern type can be recognized based on the value set in the variation category command when the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is included in the determined value within the predetermined range.

As an example of the symbol designating command, the command C400H is the first symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss”, and the command C401H is the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. According to the second symbol designation command according to, the command C402H variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change" according to the third symbol designation command, the command C403H variable display result is "big hit" "Is the fourth symbol designating command according to the case where the big hit type is "probability", and the command C404H is the fifth symbol designating command according to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the variable display result notification command may be shared.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the variable data write operation to store various data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random number value MR5 for determining the universal figure display result is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game is controlled as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result is a "small hit" and the small hit. It is a random number value used for determining whether to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of, for example, "1" to "65535". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative pattern when the variable display result is "big hit", to be "non-probable variation", "probable variation", or "probability". It is a random number value used for this purpose, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1". Takes a value in the range of "251". The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to " It takes a value in the range of "997". The random number MR5 for determining the figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is "per figure" or "missing figure". It is a random number value that is set, and takes a value in the range of, for example, “3” to “13”.

FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit".

Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 5 may be included in at least one variation pattern type among a plurality of predetermined variation pattern types. Each variation pattern type may be configured to include, for example, a single variation pattern or a plurality of variation patterns that are classified (grouped) based on the mode of the effect operation performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As an example, a plurality of variation patterns are classified (grouped) according to the type (representation mode) of the reach production, and the variation pattern type including the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach and the variation accompanied by the normal reach It may be divided into a variation pattern type that includes a pattern and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with super-reach (super reach α or super reach β). Further, the variation patterns involving super reach may be classified into different variation pattern types according to the content of the reach effect (for example, whether it is super reach α or super reach β). Alternatively, it may be classified into different variation pattern types depending on whether or not a predetermined variable display effect is executed. As another example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Some of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types may be configured to include a common fluctuation pattern.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. .. For example, the ROM 101 stores data that configures a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data forming a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of variation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data that constitutes the fluctuation pattern table is stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. 6B are provided as special figure display result decision tables. , Prepared in advance. The first special symbol display result determination table 130A, the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state It is a table that is referenced to determine. The second special symbol display result determination table 130B, the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state It is a table that is referenced to determine.

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the special figure is displayed depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the random state for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state) or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the table data indicating the decision value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the special figure display result "big hit. "Is a determination data assigned to the determination result of whether to control the big hit gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values than the times are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game is played. The probability of being determined to control the state increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probable variation state, compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, no decision value is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, when the variable display result is determined based on that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, In the case where the variable display result is determined based on the satisfaction of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is displayed. The proportion determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state as "small hit" can be made different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hitting game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a certain variation In the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as the state (high-accurate high-base state), frequent occurrence of the small hitting game state where it is difficult to obtain the winning ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B as well, a determined value within a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table 130A is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". Good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than that in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, when the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability changing state is lower than the normal base state or the low base state such as the probability changing state without time saving, the proportion determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state is lower. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines one of a plurality of jackpot types on the basis of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the jackpot game state by setting the special figure display result to "jack". It is a table referred to for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second symbol). The numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type depending on whether it is a special drawing game by the special symbol display device 4B) is a plural number such as "indeterminate change", "probable change", or "probability". It is assigned to the jackpot type.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, the allocation of the determination value to the jackpot type of “probability” differs depending on whether the variation special map is the first special diagram or the second special diagram. That is, when the variation special map is the first special figure, the determination value of the predetermined range (the value in the range of “83” to “100”) is assigned to the jackpot type “probability”, while the variation special map is assigned. Is the second special figure, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied With, it is possible to make different the proportion of determining the jackpot type “probably”. In particular, in the special drawing game using the second special drawing, since it is not decided that the big hit type is set to "probability" and the short hit open big hit state is controlled, for example, by the high open control accompanying the time saving control, the normal variable winning ball device In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of short-term open big hit state where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

Even in the case where the variation special map is the second special figure, the determined value in the predetermined range different from the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. Good. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that when the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type of “avoidance”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

In addition, in the ROM 101, in order to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on the special figure display result, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to is stored.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. The control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter setting unit 154, and the game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

Although the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A has not been started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning number into the first starting winning opening (the order in which the game balls are detected) with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition for the passage (entry) of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the establishment, are withheld. The data is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

Although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is still started. Stores pending data of a non-special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) into the second start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the second start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, etc., which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the establishment, are withheld. It is stored as data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 151B indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

In addition, withholding information (first withholding information) based on establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening, and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. ..

The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number value MR5 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count some or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and the random numbers are regularly or irregularly set according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I/O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area of the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121 by a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 writes in the RAM 122. A variation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variation data, a reception operation in which the production control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from outside the production control board 12 via the I/O 125, and the production control CPU 120 performs I/O. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

Wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control substrate 13, on the production control substrate 12. To the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, in the ROM 121, table data forming a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data forming various production control patterns, and the like are stored. Remembered

As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special figure change time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns may be stored.

The special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. , Variable display operation of decorative design, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, or various effect display operation without variable display of decorative pattern, etc. Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control contents of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed corresponding to the advance notice patterns prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents thereof.

The special figure variation time production control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns in which the production mode in each reach production is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach production.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each production control pattern, such as special control variation time production control pattern and various production control patterns, for example, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, etc. It may be configured from control data for controlling various effect operations, and the contents of various effect controls, effect control switching timings, and the like may be set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer 120. ), the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, and a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control may be set in correspondence with the predetermined control content or processing content such as that.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating an output mode of a sound effect associated with the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. There is. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of a light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the LED for decoration. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating the period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies the effect operation according to the operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be

Drawing 9 (B) is a figure for explaining various production operation performed according to the contents of a production control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to blink the light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Then, during the operation valid period designated by the operation detection control data, the operation for the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is accepted to control the effect contents. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect parts that are not controlled even though they correspond to the effect control process timer determination value.

The production operation shown in FIG. 9(B) corresponds to the entire period from the start to the final stop of the variation of the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for executing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state, etc.) Production control pattern may be provided.

The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern (special figure change time effect control pattern) based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designating command, for example, when variably displaying the decorative pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when starting execution of the effect effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the applicable effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to the corresponding various control data. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, according to the contents of the process data #1 to the process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game). Control of the effect lamp 9 and a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a movable member included in the production model, and the like is advanced. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and voice control data #1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n show the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of effect control. Control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM for development. Further, in the voice control board 13 that has received the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like for development. ..

In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying effect images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data forming the start winning award reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "8") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved storage number (for example, "8"). When there is a starting winning prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command , And the number of pending storage notification commands (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) are set as one and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A storage area is secured in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A so that these starting opening winning award designating commands, symbol designating commands, variable category commands, and reserved storage number notification commands can be associated and stored.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of starting winning from the beginning in the empty area of the starting winning time reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8”, the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation The category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “6”.

The command stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1") every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Is deleted from the one stored in, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, when a variable display of a new decorative pattern is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted and corresponds to the buffer number “2”. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “6” is changed to the buffer number. The area is shifted to the area corresponding to "2" to "5".

In the start winning award reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, the area corresponding to the buffer number "6" cannot be normally received, and an example in which the reserved storage number notification command is dropped is shown. Has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 10B, the content of the fourth storage area, in which the reserved storage number notification command should originally be stored, is “0000 (H)” corresponding to the buffer number “6”. It remains as it is.

Whether or not to execute the prefetch advance notice effect based on the command (starting mouth winning designation command, symbol designating command, variation category command and reserved storage number notification command) stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A Alternatively, a pre-reading notice pattern for execution is determined. At this time, if any missing or inconsistent commands occur at the time of winning the start prize, the pre-reading notice effect is not set until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Limited to. When a command at the time of starting winning is received during the period when the setting of the pre-reading notice production is limited (while the pre-reading notice production is restricted), it is not possible to respond to the command for which the pre-reading notice production was not set at the reception timing. The determination information is set to "1" (or ON state). In addition, when the execution of the pre-reading notice production is restricted, the pre-reading notice production of all modes is not executed for the pre-reading notice production targeting the variable display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred within the predetermined period. Alternatively, it is also possible not to execute the prefetching notice effect in some aspects.

In the start winning award reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, each buffer number (holding number) is stored in association with a "holding display form" indicating a display form of the hold storage display. When the value of this "holding display mode" is "0", it is a normal display mode, and when it is "1" or "2", it is a special mode different from the normal display mode. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect of the notice display notice is being executed, it is a special mode.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 101 is cleared, for example. Also, the register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be entered.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to cause the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S13).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform the control of the display operation in the display device 4B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It enables setting of tilting motion of winglets.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main substrate 11 to the sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, one of the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the production control After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the substrate 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by setting the switch to the off state. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process.

In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of the first special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" ( Step S203).

Normally, when the first starting opening switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), and when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (step S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the number of hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” is set as the upper limit storage number) (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S206).

After performing either of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the special figure reservation storage number corresponding to the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer is updated by adding 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second holding storage count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S208). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determination and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are extracted (step S209). Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type is whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, Is used to determine the type of big hit when the variable display result is "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol belongs. By executing the processing of step S209, the CPU 103 displays numerical data indicating some or all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. Extract.

Subsequent to the processing of step S210, the transmission setting of the starting mouth prize designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 is controlled. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning a prize designation command is performed. The starting mouth winning designation command thus set is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 is executed, and the like, from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. Transmitted.

Following the process of step S211, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S213). The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

After executing the processing of step S213, it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), and then step S204. Proceed to processing. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216). The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S212 of FIG. 13 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process causes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to be "big hit" or "small hit". A decision is made as to whether to control the state or the small hitting gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern type that abstractly classifies the variable display aspect of the decorative pattern is determined, and a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display aspect of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, in addition to these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of step S212 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not a random number value MR1 that is determined to derive and display a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol as the special symbol display result, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. Whether or not it is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, the special symbol display result will be "big hit" or "small hit", and It is pre-read that the variable display mode of the symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on the pre-read result, the production control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the production control board 12 determines whether or not to execute the pre-read advance notice production. be able to.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first checks the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and the like. The gaming state is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of step S401, the starting mouth buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current data are displayed from the table data forming the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected corresponding to the gaming state (step S402). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 13 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, the individual determination values assigned to the "big hit" special figure display results in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each value. It suffices to be able to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the decision values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum or maximum value of the big hit determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by making a comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the hold data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a “jack” (jump start determination). it can.

When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes the same process as the case of the big hit determination range with respect to the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402. Therefore, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. When it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is given to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are made (step S405). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “00H”.

Following the processing of step S405, a variation pattern type determination threshold for loss is set according to the presence or absence of time saving control in the current gaming state specified by the processing of step S401 (step S406). The fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value specifies the range of the determination value that includes the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern type determination, and is determined as one of a plurality of types of fluctuation categories that are preset according to the fluctuation pattern type or the like. It becomes a judgment value set for judging whether or not there is. In this embodiment, when at least the variable display result is “miss”, the variable category (“non-reach” is commonly used regardless of whether or not the time saving control is performed or the total number of pending memories is a variable display mode (“non-reach”). “Common” variation category), variation categories that are commonly displayed as “Super Reach” variable display modes regardless of the presence/absence of time saving control and the total number of pending storages (“Super Reach Common” variation category), and “Other” A variation category of “(variation category of “other loss””) is provided. Then, it suffices to be able to determine whether or not the variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

When it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Settings are made for transmission (step S407). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “04H”. Following the processing of step S407, a variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits is set (step S408). For example, in the process of step S408, "251" is set as the variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits. Here, "251" is the maximum value in the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number value MR3 is always a value less than or equal to the variation pattern type determination threshold for small hits. That is, it is determined that only one variation category is provided according to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”, and the variation category is determined.

When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. From the table data forming the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type determination table data is selected. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. The setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S410). As an example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be “probable variation” in step S409, the EXT data in the symbol designating command is set to “01H”, and the jackpot type is determined to be “indeterminate variation”. The EXT data in the symbol designation command is set to "02H", and when it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be "probability", a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designation command to "03H" can be set. Good. Following the processing of step S410, a variation pattern type determination threshold value is set according to the determination result of the processing of step S409 (step S411).

After performing any of the processes of steps S406, S408, and S411, using the fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value set in each process and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern type determination, The variation category corresponding to the range of the decision value including the random number value MR3 is determined (step S412).

By the processing of steps S406, S408, and S411, instead of setting a predetermined variation pattern type determination threshold value, one of the variation pattern type determination tables is set, and any variation pattern type as a variation category. You may make it determine whether it is determined by. After that, after setting for transmitting the variation category command according to the determination result of the process of step S412 to the effect control board 12 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is ended.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, even if the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the variation category that uniformly includes the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation category. Is decided. On the other hand, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit", the determination of the variation category may not be performed. In this case, the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and a pattern designating command is transmitted according to the variable display result being “big hit” or “small hit”. You may make it transmit the variable category command which shows that comprehensively.

In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13 and the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14, after the process of step S211 in FIG. 13, the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14 is performed in step S212. By doing so, the processing of steps S405, S407, S410, and S413 in FIG. 14 is executed, and further the processing of step S214 in FIG. 13 is executed. After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11, the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first starting condition. And when the second start condition is satisfied, the start mouth winning designation command (the first start mouth winning designation command or the second start mouth winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the hold memory number notification command (first hold Four commands, that is, a memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set. Note that the commands are not limited to being collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control processing of step S17 for each timer interrupt.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Then run.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the special drawing game is started by the display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, It is decided (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the special symbol decision in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (big hit symbol or Either a small hit pattern or a lost pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined. In this embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). ). Therefore, in the special symbol normal process, if the execution conditions of the special figure game using the first special figure, and the execution conditions of the special figure game using the second special figure are satisfied (first special figure pending storage In the case where the reservation data is stored in the section 151A and the second special figure reservation storage section 151B), the control for preferentially establishing the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. On the other hand, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be established in the winning order. Say).

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, based on the result of pre-determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. A process of deciding a pattern type into any of a plurality of types, or a process of deciding a variation pattern into any of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a random value MR4 for fluctuating pattern determination, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. Etc. are included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal process of step S110 and the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern including the variable display time of the fixed special symbol or the special symbol and the decorative symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process include a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and a random number value for determining the variation pattern. Using MR4, it includes a process of determining a variable display mode of a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes the process of measuring. For example, each time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is subtracted from or added to 1, Regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure on the 1 special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the drawing may be controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol (derive) It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., there is processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and set the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probability". As an example, in response to the big hit type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to "15 times", the setting for the normal open big hit state may be performed. On the other hand, in response to the jackpot type "Sudden", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening, which is the maximum number of times to execute the round, is set. By setting “15 times” to, it is sufficient to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". ..

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum value, or reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, processing for making settings for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. When the number of executions of the round does not reach the maximum winning opening maximum number, the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum reaches the maximum, The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until a lapse of time, a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the result that the variable display result is "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set as in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and set the number of times of opening the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82 may be executed.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In this small hit completion processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It includes the process of waiting until the time elapses. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control signal to be a production control command is input from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. Take in. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S73), and the command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the produced control commands are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in step S74, the effect control process process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process processing of step S75, for example, a display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the decorative light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, With respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, such as the drive operation in the effect model, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

After the effect control process process of step S75, the effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random number values for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S72.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 15 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 16, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a specific display for displaying a hold display or an in-execution display (specific display) in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H or the changing special figure display area 5I. The process is executed (step S161).

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Select and execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the like from the main board 11 is received, and whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is started. It includes a process for determining.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. In order to perform variable display and other various effect operations, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads out various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Performs various effects during variable display. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to, etc., the fixed decorative design as the final stopped design resulting in the variable display result of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command When the time elapses, the variable display result can be confirmed by autonomously deriving and displaying the fixed decorative design on the side of the effect control board 12 without depending on the effect control command from the main board 11. When the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In this special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit medium effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The effect processing during small hit in step S174 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 5. The game effect lamp 9 is operated by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the decoration LED is executed. Further, in the small hit mid effect production process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end production in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. ..

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit completion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 5. The game effect lamp 9 is operated by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control at the end of the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the decoration LED is executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

The big hit midfield effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit mid-hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 to the game effect lamp 9 or decoration. Various effect control in the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED for use is executed. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and causes an effect image based on the setting contents to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and outputting game commands (decorative signals) to the lamp control board 14 for game effect lamps 9 and decorations Various effect control at the end of the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED is executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 16 as the specific display process. In the specific display process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning is caused by a game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step S701). ). In the process of step S701, it is determined whether or not a start winning is generated by determining whether or not a start mouth winning designation command such as a first starting mouth winning designation command or a second starting mouth winning designation command is received. Good.

When it is determined that the start winning is generated (step S701; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the start winning and the specific display that is the change pattern of the display mode in the pending display notice The change pattern is determined (step S702).

In the process of step S702, the variable display result and the variation category (variation pattern) are prefetched based on the symbol designation command and the variation category command received together with the starting mouth winning designation command at the time of the start winning, and the final display mode or the specific display change is performed. The pattern is determined. In the process of step S702, the final display mode and the specific display change pattern are determined to determine the pending display notification as the prefetching notification and the effect mode thereof.

In this embodiment, as the display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. 18, “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are provided, and the specific display is displayed. In some cases, a pending display notice in which the display mode changes a predetermined number of times may be executed between the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific display and the end of the variable display. Then, as shown in the determined ratio of FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the final display mode is a big hit in the order of “white”<“blue”<“green”<“red” (a big hit reliability) or a super reach. The reliability (super reach reliability) is high.

The display mode of "white" is a display mode when the hold display notice is not executed, and is a normal mode. "Blue", "green", and "red" are display modes that change when the hold display notice is being executed, and are notice states.

In step S702, first, the final display mode may be determined according to the display result, for example, at the determination rate shown in FIG. When the final display mode is determined to be "white", the display color of the specific display does not change. That is, in this case, the reservation display notice is not executed.

In this embodiment, after determining the final display mode of the specific display, the specific display change pattern corresponding to the change process after the specific display is displayed is determined according to the number of holdings at the time of winning. Has become. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a specific display change pattern in the case where the final display mode is determined to be “red” and the winning number hold number (holding number including the prize) is “4”. Is. In this case, the pattern PT4-4-0 that does not change from the time of winning to "Red", the pattern PT4-4-1 that changes in three steps at one time, and the pattern PT4-4- that changes one step and two steps in two times. 21 and the like, and patterns PT4-4-41 and the like that change three times in one step are provided. Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display can be changed when displayed as the pending display and active display of the pending display numbers 1 to 3, and as shown in FIG. The change timing determines the change timing. For example, in the specific display change pattern PT4-4-2, the display mode is changed from “white” to “red” when the display is displayed as the hold display with the hold display number 1. In this embodiment, the change pattern of the display mode when displayed as the active display is determined by determining the specific display change pattern at the time of winning, but the change of the display mode when displayed as the active display is performed. The change pattern may be determined at the start of fluctuation independently of the change pattern of the hold display.

It should be noted that, like the specific display change pattern PT4-4-0 in FIG. 19, a pattern in which the display mode changes in the period up to the first shift is not included although it may be displayed in the notification mode from the time of winning. .. This is because the period up to the first shift depends on the timing of occurrence of the start winning, and thus the period until execution of the effect may be insufficient. For example, if a start winning occurs just before the end of the variable display, the specific display will be shifted immediately.

In this embodiment, an action effect may be executed in which the effect image moves and contacts (acts) toward the specific display before the display mode of the specific display changes. Further, in this embodiment, the change timing of the specific display is after a predetermined time has elapsed from the shift of the specific display, regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the execution time of the action effect after the specific display is shifted and before the specific display is changed. The change timing of the specific display is not limited to this. For example, when the effect production is not executed, the display mode may be changed when the specific display is shifted.

When the final display mode is "red" and the winning hold number "4", any one of the specific display change patterns shown in FIG. 19 may be determined. Although the determination ratio is not shown here, various reliability levels may be changed depending on the change timing, the number of changes, and the like. It should be noted that a plurality of types of specific display change patterns as shown in FIG. 19 may be provided according to the final display mode and the number of times of holding at winning.

If it is decided to execute the pending display notice for the specific display that is already displayed, the execution of the new pending display notice is restricted until the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends. You may do it.

After determining the final display mode and the specific display change pattern in step S702, the determination result is stored in association with the pending display number and the like (step S703). Then, based on the specific display change pattern, the control for displaying the specific display corresponding to the present start winning is executed (step S704). In step S704, the hold display or the active display may be displayed in the empty display portion of the starting winning memory display area 5H or the changing special map display area 5I in the display mode at the time of winning in the specific display change pattern determined this time.

After executing the process of step S704 or when it is determined that the start winning is not generated (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not it is the shift timing of the hold display (step S705). Since the hold display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step S705, it is determined whether it is the shift display timing of the hold display, for example, depending on whether the first or second variation start command is received. do it.

When it is determined that it is the shift timing of the hold display (step S705; Yes), the hold display of the display part of the starting prize winning memory display area 5H of the shift source is erased (step S706), and the specific display of the shift destination (hold display) Alternatively, control to display (active display) is executed (step S707). In step S707, if the pending display of the shift source is the advance notice mode, the specific display of the shift destination is displayed in the similar advance notice mode.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a time saving state (step S708). The current game state can be specified by a game state designation command. The time saving state here may be both the high-accuracy high base state and the low-accuracy high base state, or may be either of them.

When the current game state is the time saving state (step S708; Yes), it is determined whether or not the action effect is executed in the variable display this time (step S709). On the other hand, when it is not in the time saving state (step S708; No), the specific display processing is ended. That is, in this embodiment, the action effect may be executed when the game state is the time saving state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the action effect may be executed when the game state is a predetermined state, or the action effect may be executable regardless of the game state. Further, a plurality of types of effect modes may be provided so that the effect effect may be executed in a case where the effect mode is a predetermined effect mode (for example, latent probability change mode or mission mode).

In the process of step S708, whether or not to execute the action effect may be determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 20, for example, depending on whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes in the variable display this time. As shown in FIG. 20, when the display mode of the specific display changes, it is determined that the action effect is executed at a high rate, and when the display mode of the specific display does not change, the action effect is performed at a low rate. It is decided to execute. Note that the action effect when the display mode of the specific display does not change is an effect that does not change even if the action effect is executed.

In the process of step S709, when there are a plurality of specific displays, for example, it is determined whether or not the action effect is executed for each specific display in a predetermined order (for example, the order in which the variable display is executed in the later order). decide. When it is determined to execute the action effect for one specific display, the action effect for the other specific display may not be executed. By doing so, the target of the effect production becomes easy to understand. When a specific display whose display mode changes is included, it may be determined that the action effect is preferentially executed for the specific display. Further, in this case, it may be restricted so that the effect effect of Gase is not executed for another specific display. By doing so, the target of the effect effect can be easily understood, and the effect inconsistency can be prevented.

A plurality of action effects may be executed during one variable display by shifting the effect execution timing.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the action effect (step S710). When it is determined that the action effect is not executed (step S710; No), the specific display process ends. When it is determined that the action effect is to be executed (step S710; Yes), the action effect control pattern corresponding to the hold display number to be executed or the active display (display position of the specific display) is selected and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Yes (step S711). The action effect control pattern set here is read in the variable display effect process in step S172, so that the action effect is executed during the variable display. After executing the processing of step S711, the specific display processing ends.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a list of action effect control patterns. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, the start position of the action effect is different depending on the display position of the specific display which is the target (action target) of the action effect. As shown in FIG. 21, when the action destination is the active display, the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 is the start position, and when the action destination is the hold display of the hold display number 1 or 2, the image display is displayed. When the lower right of the screen of the device 5 is the start position and the destination of the action is the hold display of the hold display number 3, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is the start position. Thus, in this embodiment, the position far from the display position of the specific display is the start position of the action effect. By doing so, the distance and the period that act on the specific display become long, so that it is possible to focus on the effect.

In addition, with respect to the hold display of the hold display number 4 (display upper limit number of the hold display), it may shift immediately after being displayed, and there is a possibility that the execution time of the effect may not be secured, so the effect effect is It will never be executed. However, since the specific display change pattern is provided with a pattern that becomes a notice mode from the time of winning, the hold display of the hold display number 4 may be displayed in the notice mode before shifting from the time of winning. In this way, the player can be expected even with the hold display that is not the target of the action effect, so that the interest is improved. In this embodiment, since execution/non-execution of the action effect is determined when the hold display is shifted, execution of the action effect is not determined for the hold display before the shift. On the other hand, whether or not to execute the effect may be determined at the time of winning the start prize. In this case, when there is sufficient time to shift the hold display, the action effect may be performed on the hold display of the hold display number 4 (upper limit display number of the hold display).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the action effect is started at the start of the variable display, and the effect time of the action effect is uniformly 1300 (ms). This is shorter than the shortest variable display time of 1500 (ms). Therefore, the action effect (and the change of the display mode) can be completed during one variable display. Note that, as shown in FIG. 22, a suggestion image indicating that the action effect is executed at the start of the action effect is displayed at the start position of the action effect. Detailed effect operation will be described later.

In this embodiment, the start position of the action effect is determined by selecting the action effect control pattern corresponding to the pending display number to be executed or the active display (display position of the specific display) in the process of step S711. In the process of step S702, the start position may be determined along with the determination of the specific display change pattern, or the start position may be determined each time the variation starts.

When it is determined in step S705 that it is not the shift timing of the hold display (step S705; No), it is determined whether it is the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712). In step S712, whether or not 1300 (ms) has elapsed from the start of variable display and the stored specific display change pattern changes the display mode in the current variable display (hold display number or active display). It may be determined whether or not there is. If it is not the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712; No), the specific display process ends.

If it is the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S712; Yes), the display mode of the target specific display is changed to a color corresponding to the specific display change pattern (step S713). After that, the specific display process ends.

Next, an example of the effect operation when the effect effect is executed will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the image display device 5 when the action effect is executed. As shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, when the total number of reserved memories is 4, the reserved displays H1 and H2 of the reserved display numbers 1 and 2 and the active display AH are displayed from the center of the image display device 5. Displayed on the left. The hold displays H3 and H4 of the hold display numbers 3 and 4 are displayed on the right side of the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 23(A), when the action effect is performed on the hold display H3 of the hold display number 3, after the suggestion image I1 is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, the suggestion is performed. The action effect in which the image I1 to the star image I2 acts on the hold display H3 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 23(B), when the action effect is performed on the hold display H2 of the hold display number 2, after the suggestion image I1 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, An action effect in which the image I2 of the star and the image I2 of the star act on the hold display H2 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 23C, when the action effect is performed on the hold display H1 with the hold display number 1, after the suggestion image I1 is displayed on the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, The action effect in which the image I2 of the stars from the suggestion image I1 acts on the hold display H1 is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of start positions (starting directions) of the effect effect, and the start position of the effect effect differs depending on the display position of the hold display (specific display). In this way, since the start position of the action effect changes according to the position of the hold display, the interest of the action effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the start position of the action effect for the hold display is two places at the lower right and the lower left, but the start position of the action effect is farther from the hold display. By doing so, the display distance of the image to be made to act in the action effect becomes long, so that the player can easily pay attention to the action effect. The start position of the action effect for the hold display may be other than the lower right corner or the lower left corner. For example, if the start position is other than the lower right or lower left, the jackpot reliability may be increased, the change rate of the hold display of the action target may be increased, or the number of change steps may be increased. May be.

When the action effect is performed on the hold display H1 of the hold display number 1, the distance from the start position to the action destination is greater than when the action effect is performed on the hold display H2 of the hold display number 2. Becomes distant. The hold display H1 is also the hold display farthest from the start position. In this embodiment, since the effect time of the effect effect is constant as shown in FIG. 21, as shown in FIGS. 23B and 23C, the effect effect for the hold display H1 of the hold display number 1 is held. The orbit of the star image I2 is lower (the moving distance is shorter) as compared with the action effect of the display number 2 on the hold display H2. By doing so, even if the distance from the start position of the action effect to the action destination is different, the action effect can be suitably executed. The timing of the star image I2 acting on the hold display H1 may be advanced by making the orbit of the star image I2 the same and increasing the moving speed.

As shown in FIG. 23D, when the action effect is performed on the active display AH, after the suggestion image I3 different from the suggestion image I1 is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, An action effect in which the suggestion image I3 acts on the active display AH is executed. In this way, the action effect for the active display is a special action effect different from the action effect for the hold display. By performing such a special action effect, the interest of the effect is improved.

Note that a special action effect may be performed on the hold display, or a normal action effect may be performed on the active display. In this case, various expectations (variation rate of specific display, reliability, etc.) may be different depending on whether it is a special effect or a normal effect.

In addition, in FIG. 23, the case where four hold displays are displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H has been described, but it is also possible to display eight hold displays, which is the upper limit of the total number of hold storages. In this case, the hold displays of the hold display numbers 1 to 4 may be displayed on the left side of the center of the image display device 5, and the hold displays of the hold display numbers 5 to 8 may be displayed on the right side of the center of the image display device 5. The start position of the action effect for the hold display numbers 1 to 4 is the right side (lower right) of the image display device 5, and the start position of the action effect to the hold display numbers 5 to 7 is the left side (lower left) of the image display device 5. do it.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above-described embodiment, the start position (starting direction) of the action effect is different depending on the display position of the specific display, but the change ratio of the target specific display, the number of change stages, the jackpot reliability, the super reach reliability, The start position may be changed according to the number of reserved memories. Further, the determination rate of the start position may be changed based on these. By doing this, it is possible to have a sense of expectation with respect to the start position of the action effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the action effect is executed for the hold display and the active display, but the action effect may be executed only for the hold display. In the case where the action effect is executed only for the hold display, the present invention can be applied to the gaming machine without the changing special figure display area 5I.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect time of the effect effect is uniformly 1300 (ms), which is shorter than the shortest variable display time of 1500 (ms). The present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a pattern with a long production time. For example, the effect time of the effect effect for the hold display number 1 farthest from the start position of the effect effect may be longer than the effect time of the other effect effects. By doing so, the trajectory and the moving speed of the image to be applied to the hold display can be made similar to those of other action effects. In this case, the time for which the image to be operated for the hold display is displayed becomes long, so that the player can easily pay attention to the action effect. In this case, for an action effect with a long effect time, the start timing of the action effect (movement of an image on which it acts) may be advanced. For example, the start timings of action effects with different effect times may be different, and the end timings of action effects may be the same.

A plurality of action effect control patterns having different effect times may be prepared, and one of the action effect control patterns (effect time) may be determined based on the change pattern (change time). Further, when the action effect is executed in a pattern having a long effect time, the action effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

When the action effect is started, the visibility of the image (the suggestion image or the like) used for the action effect and the effect image (the background image or the like) other than the specific display may be reduced. For example, until the action effect is completed, the suggestion image and a specific display other than the target of the action effect are displayed in a blackout or dark so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By doing so, the suggestive image and the specific display that is the target of the action effect can be emphasized and displayed, and the action effect can be more easily noticed.

In the above embodiment, the start position of the action effect is determined to be far from the display position of the specific display, but the start position of the action effect is determined at a predetermined rate according to the display position of the specific display. You may do it. In this case, the start position far from the display position of the specific display may be determined at a high rate.

Further, the start position of the action effect may be closer to the display position of the specific display.

When the action effect is continuously executed in a plurality of variable displays, the start position of the action effect may be different for each variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the action effect from being continuously executed from the same direction and making it difficult to understand the action effect. Further, the larger the number of times the action effect is executed for one specific display, the higher the change rate, the number of change stages, the jackpot reliability, and the super reach reliability of the target specific display may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the action effect will be continuously executed. Further, the action effect may be executed a plurality of times in one variable display.

The action effect of Gase may be executed from a predetermined direction (for example, the lower left of the screen). By doing so, it is possible to infer the degree of expectation because the effect has not been executed from the direction in which it should be executed.

The suggestion image may be different depending on the start position of the action effect. Further, the suggestion image itself may act on the hold display. Further, the suggestion image may be changed according to the action destination of the action effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the action effect from being continuously executed from the same direction and making it difficult to understand the action effect.

Further, a movable accessory 200 capable of performing a predetermined operation may be provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 to execute an accessory effect of operating the accessory 200. For example, the accessory 200 is a accessory motor (may be another actuator) on the front side of the image display device 5 in the downward direction, that is, on the front side of the screen of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. It is configured to be movable. The standby position (initial position) of the accessory 200 is the center of the upper portion of the image display device 5. The accessory 200 can be moved from the standby position to the front side of the display areas 5H and 5I for displaying the hold display and the active display. The accessory 200 may be configured to be capable of emitting light by a light emitting device such as an LED.

FIG. 24 is an example of the effect operation when the display mode of the hold display after the effect effect by the character changes. In FIG. 24, unlike the above-described embodiment, a case where the character CHR-A acts on the hold display is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the changing special map display area 5I is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5, and the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is on the left and right of the changing special map display area 5I (left is the first special map, The right corresponds to the second special figure).

FIG. 24A shows the image display device 5 in which the variable display is executed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the active display AH and the hold displays H1 and H2 are displayed. FIG. 24B shows the start timing of the first half of the action effect by the character. In this way, the character CHR-A is displayed at a position where it does not suffer even if the accessory 200 moves.

FIG. 24C shows that the character effect is being performed by the character object 200. In this way, the accessory 200 is moved to a position that covers at least a part of the starting winning prize memory display area 5H in which the hold display of the target is displayed. Here, the accessory 200 completely covers the target hold display H2.

FIG. 24D shows that the action effect by the character is being executed in the latter half. In this way, the character CHR-A acts on the hold display H2 while not being hidden by the accessory 200. That is, the action effect is executed in a state where the effect 200 is not hidden by the accessory 200.

FIG. 24E shows the timing of the pending change effect. In this way, as a result of the action effect, the hold change effect in which the mode (display color here) of the hold display H2 changes is executed.

As described above, in this modified example, when the accessory effect is executed during the period in which the effect effect is executed, the specific display is not incurred at least when the change of the display mode of the specific display (the hold display notice) is executed. The accessory 200 is operated as described above. By doing so, it is possible to perform the character effect later without impairing the visibility of the specific display. Then, the player can promptly confirm the change mode of the specific display. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when performing the character effect during the period in which the effect effect is executed, the character object 200 is operated so as not to receive the specific display at least when the change of the display mode of the specific display (preliminary display of the hold display) is executed. The control for this may be arbitrary. For example, when the character effect and the effect effect are determined by different processes, when the character effect is executed, the effect patterns of the character effect and the effect effect that are not covered are determined. Good. In addition, when the action effect (preliminary notice of pending change) is executed, the effect pattern (preliminary notice of pending change) and the effect pattern of the accessory effect that is not covered may be determined.

The action effect (display of the suggestion image) may be started from a position that does not overlap the decorative pattern or the reduced decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern from being deteriorated in the action effect.

In addition, as in the modified example in FIG. 24, when the start winning award memory display area 5H is provided on the left and right of the changing special figure display area 5I (the left corresponds to the first special figure and the right corresponds to the second special figure) The start position of the action effect may be far from or close to the position where the specific display of the action target is shifted (digested).

In addition, as in the modified example in FIG. 24, when the start winning award memory display area 5H is provided on the left and right of the changing special figure display area 5I (the left corresponds to the first special figure and the right corresponds to the second special figure) The start position of the action effect may be different depending on the direction in which the specific display is shifted (digested). For example, the action effect may be started in the direction in which the specific display is shifted (forward direction), or the action effect may be started in the opposite direction in which the specific display is shifted. May be.

In the modified example in FIG. 24, the action effect for the active display may be started from a position close to the accessory 200. By doing so, it becomes easier to pay attention to the action effect, and the interest of the effect can be improved by linking the action effect and the operation of the accessory 200.

A predetermined period is provided from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect, and the display mode of the suggestion image may change in the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect. There may be. In this modification, the action effects of the first to third patterns are provided.

FIG. 25: is a figure for demonstrating the effect of a modification. FIG. 25A is a diagram showing a display example of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation. 25(b), (d), and (f) are diagrams showing display examples of the image display device 5 at the time when the suggestion image is displayed when the action effect is executed. 25C, 25E, and 25G are diagrams showing display examples of the image display device 5 when the action effects of the first pattern to the third pattern in the modified example are executed.

As shown in FIG. 25( a ), three downward arrows indicate that the left, middle, and right decorative designs are being variably displayed. It is assumed that, from the state of FIG. 25A, a new start winning is generated and the starting winning is accompanied by an action effect (including a goose effect that does not change the hold). Such a hold display will be described below as a target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 25( b ), when the target hold TH occurs and is displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the first character image 91 as a suggestive image is displayed. The first character image 91 has a humanoid shape and is displayed with an image indicated by an arrow on the right hand.

From the state of FIG. 25( b ), the action production of the first pattern shown in FIG. 25( c) is executed during the execution of the previous variable display in which the variable display of the target hold TH is started. In the first pattern of action effect, an effect of throwing the arrow image that the first character image 91 displayed first has toward the target holding TH is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 25(c), the arrow image does not reach the target hold TH and stalls midway without acting on the target hold TH. In this way, the action effect of the first pattern of the gasse in which the action effect is executed but the holding change does not actually occur is shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25(d), when the target hold TH occurs and is displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H from the state of FIG. 25(a), a second character image 92 as a suggestion image is displayed. To be done. The second character image 92 is humanoid and is displayed in a manner of holding an image indicated by an arrow on the right hand, and is different in color from the first character image 91, for example.

In the state of FIG. 25D, the second pattern action effect shown in FIG. 25E is executed during execution of the previous variable display in which the variable display of the target hold TH is started. In the second pattern of action effect, an effect of throwing the arrow image that the first character image 92 displayed first has toward the target holding TH is executed. As shown in FIG. 25(e), the arrow image acts on the hold display by being stuck in the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from normal white (white circle in the figure) to the jackpot expectation level. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By changing the display mode of the target hold TH, it is possible to expect that the hold display will be a big hit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25F from the state of FIG. 25A, when the target hold TH occurs and the target hold TH is displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the first character image 91 as a suggestion image is displayed. To be done.

From the state of FIG. 25(f), the effect production of the third pattern shown in FIG. 25(g) is executed during execution of the previous variable display in which the variable display of the target hold TH is started. In the third pattern action effect, the character image is changed from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 in a predetermined period until the effect in which the first displayed first character image 91 throws the arrow image is executed. Change. Specifically, the character image changes from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 during the execution of the variable display immediately before the variable display of the target hold TH is started. Then, an effect of throwing the arrow image that the second character image 92 has toward the target holding TH is executed. As shown in FIG. 25(g), the arrow image acts on the hold display by sticking into the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from normal white (white circle in the figure) to the jackpot expectation level. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By executing such an action effect, the process of the action effect can be paid attention to, and the interest of the game is improved. Note that the display timing of the suggestion image, the change timing of the character image, and the action timing of the image with respect to the hold display may be any timing from the display of the target hold until the end of the variable display corresponding to the target hold. ..

In this modification, when the second character image 92 is displayed as compared with the case where the first character image 91 is displayed as the suggestion image, the rate of change in the pending display and the reliability are higher. do it. By providing the third pattern in which the first character image 91 changes to the second character image 92 before the action effect is executed, the degree of expectation is displayed even when the first character image 91 having a low degree of expectation is displayed. Since the second character image 92 having a high value may be changed, the player's expectation can be maintained. It should be noted that the second pattern and the third pattern may have the same degree of expectation (the rate at which the pending display changes or the degree of reliability), or may have a higher degree of expectation. If the third pattern has a higher expectation, and the suggestion image with a lower expectation is displayed, the expectation is higher when the suggestion image changes, so that the player's expectation should be further maintained. You can

In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change time and the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, one change at the time of starting the change. Although the example of transmitting the pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the main board (main side) uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern designating command) indicating a fluctuation time and a fluctuation mode (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern) before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery effect. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching the reach (after a so-called second stop if the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the main board may notify the variation time by each of two commands, and the effect control board may select the specific variation mode executed at each timing. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt (In) the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, whether the display mode of the hold storage display in the look-ahead notice production is generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, or the second It was the same regardless of whether it was generated based on the starting winning award due to the game ball passing through (entering) the starting winning opening, but the gaming ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening The display mode (color, shape, etc.) is generated depending on whether the game is generated based on the start winning a prize or the start winning a prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting prize hole. ) May be different.

In the process of step S403 shown in FIG. 14, the determination is performed using the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402. In this way, as the big hit determination data indicating the big hit determination range used to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", a predetermined number when the gaming state is not the sure change state (high-precision state) The normal determination data including the jackpot determination value and the special determination data including the jackpot determination value larger than the predetermined number when the game state is the probability change state are provided, and when the start winning occurs When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the variable display result is determined using the normal determination data, while when the game state when the start winning occurs is the probability variation state, the variable display result is determined using the special determination data. judge. Here, when the gaming state is the probability change state, the variable display result is determined as "big hit" by using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning. When it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probable variation" by using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the probability variation control is not performed after the jackpot gaming state ends, The execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning that has occurred during the period until the probability variation control ends based on the display result in the variable display that is the target of the determination may be restricted. As a result, even if the probability variation control ends, the pre-reading announcement effect is executed based on the determination result that the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" using the special determination data corresponding to the probability variation state. This can be prevented and the consistency of the effect contents can be maintained.

In the above embodiment, the special drawing game using the first special map is executed based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, and the game that has passed (entering) the second starting winning opening. The special figure game using the second special figure is executed based on the detection of a sphere. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special drawing game using the common special symbol is executed regardless of which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passes (enters). It may be one.

In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily within the range that does not.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a game ball is paid out to the player as a prize, and the player shoots the paid out game ball (which may be a rental ball) to the game area to perform a game. Although it was a gaming machine, it gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by information recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention is also applicable to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a game area by using the granted game score or the game score awarded by a prize for the game. You can

That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area provided in the game area, a variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and deriving and displaying the display result. This is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means. However, when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine. A game is played by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hitting of the game ball, and the game score is awarded when the game ball wins the prize area provided in the game area. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game scores is inserted, and a game recording medium. A game recording medium processing means for reading the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion opening may be provided.

What is displayed in the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of deviating symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. .. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above-described embodiment, the main side makes the prefetch judgment and sends the command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side, but the main side sends the command indicating the random number value to make the preread judgment on the sub side. You may do it.

In the above embodiment, by determining the jackpot type at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is the "probability variation state", but at the start of the variation, the big winning opening pattern ( Only the mode of the round game) is determined (it may be specified by the big hit type etc.), and the big hit game is based on the fact that the game ball has passed a particular area (for example, a particular area within the special winning opening) during the big hit game state. The gaming state after the state may be set to the “probably changed state”.

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device included in. Furthermore, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the below-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

Other than the above, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
Specific display means (for example, a starting winning memory display area 5H, a changing special figure display area 5I, etc.) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display, etc.) relating to the variable display,
Action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by causing the effect image to act on the specific display (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps S709, S711, and S172). When,
A special display means for performing a special display capable of changing the display mode step by step in accordance with the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a special display production),
A special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
The action effect executing means changes the start position of the action effect according to the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the action effect (for example, FIG. 21, FIG. 23),
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, the icon as the special display should be displayed. The special display change notification for notifying is displayed for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed (the special display changes, etc.),
The special notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed. It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after the
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to grasp the game situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the above gaming machine, an effect accompanied by a special display or a special notification may be executed during the display of the specific display from the viewpoint of further enhancing the interest. Furthermore, a special notification regarding a specific display or action effect may be executed. Further, when the special notification regarding the action effect is executed, the execution timing of the action display may change. Further, the special notification regarding the action effect may be executed before the action effect is executed, or may be executed after the action effect is executed. Furthermore, the special notification regarding the action effect may be executed together with the execution of the action effect. Note that the special notification regarding the action effect may be executed before the action effect is executed and may be executed again after the action effect is executed.

Further, in the above gaming machine, the display mode of the special display and the special notification mode may be changed depending on the display mode of the specific display from the viewpoint of further enhancing the interest. Further, the display mode of the special display and the special notification mode may be changed depending on the mode of the action effect.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine capable of grasping the gaming situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and preventing a decrease in the gaming interest,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A special display means for performing a special display capable of changing the display mode step by step in accordance with the degree of advantage (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for performing a special display production),
A special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game (for example, a production control CPU 90120 for making an abnormality notification),
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period of time elapses after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, when the icon as the special display is displayed). Notification of special display change is continuously issued for a predetermined period, and then an icon is displayed (special display changes, etc.),
The notification execution means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed). It is possible to notify the abnormality within a predetermined period thereafter),
A gaming machine characterized by that. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, one embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 26 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven into it.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 26, on the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like, and is identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also called “special symbols”) that are possible plural types of identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variably displayed). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

Symbol numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of types of special symbols are attached. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, respectively, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Below, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B are also referred to as "second special symbols". ..

Both the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, the numbers indicating “0” to “9” and the symbol indicating “−”), or the types may be different. May be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B may be respectively configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99". ..

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game, respectively. In the decorative pattern display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, for example, decorative patterns which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 904B, The variation (for example, vertical scroll display) of the decorative design is started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905. The fixed decorative design (final stop design) that is the variable display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

Thus, in the display area of the image display device 905, a special drawing game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A, or a special special character using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronism with the drawing game, a plurality of types of distinguishable decorative patterns that can be respectively identified are variably displayed, and the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means terminating the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbol in a stop display (also called a complete stop display or a final stop display). .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The design may be displayed in a stopped state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion/contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern completely in a stopped state for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction.

The decorative patterns that are variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R include, for example, eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). It may be a number, an alphabetic character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the decorative designs. For example, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a combination causing a loss can be configured.

After the variable display of the decorative design is started, the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed until the fixed decorative design that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow from top to bottom in order from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative pattern with the largest symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, The decorative design with the smallest design number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" decorative pattern display area 905L, etc.), scroll display is performed from a large symbol number to a small symbol number, When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning a prize memory display area 905H is arranged. In the starting winning a prize memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game in a identifiable manner is performed. Here, in the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special drawing game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It is generated based on the winning prize for starting by entering. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special drawing game and the variable display of the decorative pattern is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Done.

In the example shown in FIG. 26, along with the starting winning prize memory display area 905H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold storage number in a specifiable manner at the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of storages in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending. The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply referred to as “special figure reserved storage number”, it usually means a concept including all of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included, but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable wing pieces that are switched between a normal open state in which the vertical position is set and an enlarged open state in which the tilted position is set by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning hole. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. Although the normal variable winning ball device 906B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even in the normal open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning ball device 906B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and in a normally opened state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 27. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 9022B. May be the same or different from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 27, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a big prize hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball is opened to another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when you pass (enter). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 26), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary pattern (also referred to as "general drawing" or "normal drawing") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also called "normal figure game").

Above the normal symbol display 9020, a universal figure hold display 9025C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided in the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided.

A stick controller 9031A that can be held by the player and tilted is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). There is. With the trigger button, the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with the operating hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 901. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. The photo sensor may be included.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). It is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 9041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 27, the ordinary symbol display 9020 executes the variable display of the ordinary symbol. After the universal figure starting condition for is satisfied, for example, the previous universal figure game is finished, based on that the universal figure start condition for starting the variable display of the regular symbol is established, the normal symbol display 9020 The public figure game by is started.

In this public figure game, after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when a predetermined time which is the general figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is “ordinary symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion and opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip that constitutes the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilt position is performed. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, after the game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 27, for example, The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended. In addition, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, for example, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the last special figure game or the jackpot gaming state having ended.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol The finalized special symbol (result of special symbol display) that results is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2” are the small hit symbols. , The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 907 has a predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

The special winning opening ball device, in which the special winning opening door is opened during the execution of the round, receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the special winning opening. 907 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball has not been won in the special winning opening). ..

Of the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "7" are usually open round big hit symbols and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the jackpot gaming state (normally open jackpot state) as the normal opening round specific game state, which is controlled after the normal opening round jackpot symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the special winning a prize ball device 907 special winning opening The door opens the special winning opening until a predetermined upper limit time (29 seconds, for example), which is the first period, or a predetermined number (10, for example) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round of changing the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big-hit symbol is derived. In the big-hit gaming state (short-term open big-hit state) as a specific game state, the special variable winning ball device 907 is used in each round. The upper limit time (upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state (for example, 0 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-time open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open big hit state, if a game ball wins the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which a payout (prize ball) is practically not obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

In addition, the big hit game state as a short-term open round specific game state is not limited to one in which the period of opening the special winning opening is shorter than that of the big hit game state as the normal opening round specific playing state. For example, opening of the special winning opening. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that the special winning opening is in the open state is It may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period during which the big winning opening is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also shorter, and the number of times the round is executed is at least one of the second round number that is smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. ..

After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, as in the short-term open big hitting state, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 907, the variable winning operation for changing the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is performed. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 907 in the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period.

In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided on the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and In the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B, in response to the start of one of the special figure games, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Then, from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

Here, the reach state is a decorative pattern that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation pattern”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative patterns are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. Specifically, in a part of the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905R, etc.) in advance. The remaining decorative pattern display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern showing alphanumeric characters "7") that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the design display area 905C or the like), the display state that the decoration pattern is changing, or the decoration pattern is a big hit in all or part of the "left", "middle", "right" decoration pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R It is a display state in which all or a part of the combination is formed and is changing in synchronization.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, you can perform a staging operation different from that before the reach state. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach production display (or simply reach production). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are put in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, the possibility of becoming a “big hit” (also called “reliability” or “big hit reliability”) is different in each reach mode. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are preset. Then, when the reach mode of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit expectation degree) becomes higher than that when the reach mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be the reach state, the variable display result may be a "big hit", etc. A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed by a variable display mode of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-run" can be executed. Whether or not the variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-relation” is executed should be determined in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 9011 side. Note that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is executed on the effect control board 9012 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side.

In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2" of the temporarily displayed decorative design display areas). )) in the decorative pattern display area (for example, either or both of the “left” decorative pattern display area 905L and the “right” decorative pattern display area 905R), the decorative pattern is changed again and then stopped and displayed. The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. In this way, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number is displayed. By performing the variable display for the decorative pattern again, when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative pattern forming the non-reach combination is not stopped and the stop state is displayed. is there.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo run", the variable display is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once. After temporarily displaying the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R until the finalized decorative design as a result is derived and displayed, The effect display for changing (re-changing) the decorative pattern again in all the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of pseudo-continuous variations in this embodiment is “left”, “middle”, and “right” excluding the initial variations from the start of variable display of decorative designs until the first temporary suspension of all decorative designs. The number of times the decorative design is changed again in all of the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-opportunities Once the decorative pattern constituting the is temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result, after that, the variable display (re-fluctuation) is performed again. The pseudo consecutive chances may include a combination of decorative patterns that is a predetermined non-reach combination, instead of the variable display mode of the decorative patterns being the reach mode. Further, the pseudo consecutive chances may include a combination of decorative patterns which becomes a predetermined reach-miss combination (simply referred to as “reach combination”) after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode. For example, in the pseudo continuous chance eye, the decorative pattern (middle pattern) stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 905C is a special decorative pattern (pseudo continuous chance pattern) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the normal time. ). Among the decorative patterns that are also used in the variable display of the decorative pattern at the normal time, the pseudo continuous chance pattern that is the pseudo continuous chance by being stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 905C may be included. ..

In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous", re-variation (pseudo continuous variation) is performed, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The variable display can be made to appear as if it was started multiple times in succession. In addition, in the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous" in the present embodiment, the re-variation (pseudo continuous fluctuation) is supposed to be performed at most once for easy understanding, but the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous" is described. The number of times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation in may be performed more than once, for example, twice or three times. In addition, in the variable display of "pseudo continuous" in this embodiment, the pseudo display that temporarily displays the temporary stop and then changes again (that is, whether or not the pseudo continuous chance eye displays the temporary stop) is simulated. The continuous production is executed. Specifically, in the pseudo continuous production, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and the pseudo continuous chance symbol is displayed (the pseudo continuous chance common to the success and failure productions described later). A design is displayed), and an effect of driving whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance design is temporarily stopped is executed. A mode in which the pseudo-repeated chance symbol is stopped and displayed is called success production, and a mode in which the temporary stop display is not displayed is called failure production. As described above, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" in the present embodiment, the re-variation is performed once at the maximum, and therefore, the variation pattern of the pseudo-run that is not re-varied is re-varied. It is a variation pattern of the gaze that only fuels that (it is referred to as a variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gas), and when the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is performed based on the variation pattern, the failure effect is executed. Become. In addition, instead of displaying a special decorative design such as a pseudo continuous chance design in the pseudo continuous production, or together with the stop display of the special decorative design, each variable display by the variable display production of "pseudo continuous" (first variation (Including), a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 (displayed as a common introduction effect).

As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, in addition to “slip” and “pseudo-relation”, for example, “developing opportunity eye”, “developing opportunity eye end”, “chance eye stop slip” Various effect operations such as the above may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "development opportunity eye", from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, "left", "middle", "right" In all of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the decorative patterns constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and then the variable display state of the decorative patterns is reached. As a predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative pattern forming the development opportunity is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" after the reach state. Expectations are increased.

Further, in the variable display effect of "end of development opportunity", after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, in all of the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. The effect display is performed in which the decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as the development opportunity is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of "slip after opportunity stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in all, after temporarily displaying the decorative pattern of the miss combination (special combination) to be the pseudo consecutive chance, Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" that changes the decorative pattern again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the decorative pattern is changed again in a part of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. By doing so, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also called “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is the lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or without the reach effect, the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the regular jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "3" or the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped. When it is displayed, in response to the variable display state of the decorative pattern being in the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, a combination of a plurality of jackpots Among them, the fixed decorative design which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative symbols that are a combination of big hits are, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905. Any one of the decorative patterns of "8" is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Anything will do.

Whether or not to control to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished during the execution of a predetermined round in the jackpot gaming state after the definite decorative pattern to be the jackpot combination is derived and displayed (whether a certain variation as a privilege is given Whether or not), a bonus jackpot promotion effect is executed. As will be described later in detail, in the big hit mid-promotion effect, for example, a battle effect in which characters fight each other in the display area of the image display device 905 may be performed. Then, the player may be notified so that the player can recognize whether or not the main character wins or loses and is promoted to a probable change state after the jackpot game state is over (whether or not a probable change is given as a privilege). In addition, during the big hit promotion production, the round in the big hit game state is not being executed, and at the start of the big hit game state or the period from the end of one round in the big hit game state to the start of the next round, It may be performed in a period from the end of the final round in the big hit game state to the start of the next variable display game. In addition, the big hit middle promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the big hit game state. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

In the big hit middle promotion effect, it notifies that the gaming state after the big hit game state is in a probable state (notifies that a privilege is granted) Yes (notifies that the privilege is not granted) There is a promotion failure during big hit. Then, in the case where the promotion success effect during the big hit is executed, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is controlled to the probability change state. On the other hand, when the big hit middle promotion failure effect is performed, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is not controlled to the probable variation state (non-probable variation state), but is controlled to the time saving state. In the probability change state, in the variable display of each special figure game and the decorative design, the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is improved to be higher than the normal state or the time saving state. .. Such a probability changing state continues regardless of the number of times the special figure game is executed until the next variable display result is a "big hit". The time saving state is a gaming state in which the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after turning on the power). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In such a time saving state, when one of the conditions that the special drawing game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is established first, finish.

In the probability change state and the time saving state, the control for shortening the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular symbol game (normal symbol variation time) by the regular symbol display 9020 than in the normal state, and the variable of the regular symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result will be "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the time saving state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening in the probability changing state or the time saving state and which is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second starting winning opening being in the expanded opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probability changing state and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state is more likely to occur than in the normal state (the gaming state is advantageous to the player). The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to either the probability changing state or the time saving state. .. Also, when the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base. On the other hand, when not in the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state also called a low certainty high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state also called a low certainty low base state. In addition, the probability variation state is a gaming state which is also referred to as a high precision high base state. In other words, when the big hit middle promotion success production is executed, the game state after the big hit game state is finished is controlled to be the probable variation state, so that it is controlled to the highly precise and high base state. On the other hand, when the big hit mid-promotion failure production is performed, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is not controlled to the probable state (non-probable variation state) and is controlled to the short-time state, so the low-probability high-base It will be controlled by the state.

The probability variation state may include a state in which the time variation control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control, and a state in which the time variation control and the high opening control are not performed but only the probability variation control is performed. As an example, after completion of the 15-round big hit state based on the variable display result in the special figure game being “probability variation big hit”, the first probability variation state (high probability variation) in which time saving control and high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control. Controlled to the base state). After that, when the special figure display result does not become a “big hit” and the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time saving control and the high opening control are performed. May be controlled to a second surely changed state (also referred to as a highly accurate low base state) after the completion of the above. After the 2-round big hit state, which is based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is "a sudden big hit" in the normal state, the state shifts to the second positive change state and only the positive change control is performed. However, the time saving control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result in the special figure game is "a sudden big hit" in the probability changing state or the time saving state, after the 2-round big hitting state ends, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Time reduction control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the end of the 15-round big hit state based on the "probable variation big hit", the first probability variation state is controlled until the special figure display result becomes "big hit" again, while the 2 round big hit state based on the "probable sudden big hit" After the end, the state shifts to the first probability variation state, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the state shifts to the second probability variation state. May be. The time saving control and the high opening control are started and ended at the same time (in conjunction with each other), but the start and the end of the probability variation control are not necessarily linked with the start and the end of the time saving control and the high opening control. May be.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of fixed decorative designs determined in advance as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Also, as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After that, the fixed decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern which becomes a chance eye corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

In response to the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becoming a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "sudden big hit" or "sudden probability big hit"). The short-term open big hit state may be controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" for the "hit" big hit type.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed, and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the state before the small hit. However, if the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed and the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit game state ends, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

When the special winning design that constitutes the opening chance eye is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative design, and the special winning opening is opened, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" There are times when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state based on that, and when it is controlled to a small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". On the other hand, the reason why the special winning opening is opened after the fixed decorative pattern forming the reach combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative pattern is that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable" Only when it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state based on this. Therefore, the fixed decorative pattern constituting the opening chance eye corresponds to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit game state, while the fixed decorative pattern of the reach combination is the short-term open big hit state. It corresponds to being controlled by.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a production control board 9012. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that constitutes the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of the predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting/lighting/coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function.

On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100 and a switch circuit 90110 that captures detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 90100, a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L, 908R. , Various circuits for controlling the performance operation by electric parts for performance such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the production control board 9012 produces all or a part of the display operation in the image display device 905, the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the whole or a part of the lighting/extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909. It is provided with a function for determining the control content for causing the electric component for use to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The voice control board 9013 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for driving is installed.

As shown in FIG. 27, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 is connected to the main substrate 9011. The gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. Anything you have is acceptable. Further, on the main board 9011, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, the first holding display device 9025A, the second holding display device 9025B, the universal figure holding display device 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It also includes a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value is updated independently of the CPU 90103. A random number circuit 90104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 90105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101 to read fixed data, the CPU 90103 writes varying data to the RAM 90102 to temporarily store the varying data, and the CPU 90103 stores various varying data to be temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105, and a CPU 90103 outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105. The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, to regularly or irregularly update various numerical data by software, thereby making a part of various random number values. You may make it count the numerical data which show. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data forming a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 9011, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns are configured. The table data and the like to be stored are stored.

FIG. 28 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Among the cases where the display result is "big hit", when the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change" and "probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", etc. Correspondingly, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach is executed. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A and super reach B regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "miss". In the illustrated example, the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation" is performed in the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or the case where the variable display result is "miss". However, even when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probability” or when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable display effect of “pseudo-link” may be performed. Further, although the variation pattern in which the variable display effect of "pseudo-relation" is performed is the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern may be a normal reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern. Similarly, with regard to the variation pattern of pseudo continuous gas, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", the variable display result is "small hit", normal reach or non-reach. Good. Further, as described above, the illustrated example shows an example in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation is at most once, but there are fluctuation patterns that can be executed more than once, such as twice and three times. May be. In addition, variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” may be performed in other illustrated variation patterns.

The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 27 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, part or all of the content of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. Such a RAM 90102 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The I/O 90105 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 is for inputting various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100, and for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port.

As shown in FIG. 27, the production control board 9012 is provided with a production control CPU 90120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124 and an I/O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121 for a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variable data in the RAM 90122 for temporary storage, and the effect control CPU 90120 writes in the RAM 90122. A variation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variation data, a reception operation in which the production control CPU 90120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the production control board 9012 via the I/O 90125, and the production control CPU 90120 performs I/O. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the audio control board 9013, To the lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action of the player for the stick controller 9031A is transmitted from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and a game for the push button 9031B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like, the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation are updatable counted. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 27, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring a determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. Remembered

As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, and the effect model). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is made up of data or the like indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special figure change time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns may be stored.

The special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. , Variable display operation of decorative design, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, or various effect display operation without variable display of decorative pattern, etc. Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control contents of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed corresponding to the advance notice patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are made up of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The special figure variation time production control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns in which the production mode in each reach production is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach production.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets the effect control pattern (special figure variation effect control pattern) based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designating command when, for example, variably displaying the decorative pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (advance effect control pattern), for example, when starting execution of a predetermined effect such as an effect effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the applicable effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be specified. A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the voice control board 9013, or the like. In the display control unit 90123 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM for development. Further, in the voice control board 9013 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like for development. .. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to the corresponding various control data. Control.

The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and a predetermined process which is a game control main process is executed by the CPU 90103. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets necessary interrupt settings after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 90102 is cleared, for example. In addition, register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 9021, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, and the count via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, is output (step S9013).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1' to MR3' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9014). After this, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Various kinds of processing are selected and executed in order to perform operation control, opening/closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S9016). The CPU 90103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display device 9020 by executing the normal symbol process process, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It enables setting of tilting motion of winglets.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control processing, one of the output ports included in the I/O 90105 is used for the effect control board 9012 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for a predetermined time and then to the off state. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing performed in step S9015 of FIG. In the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90101 of FIG. 30 as the start winning determination processing.

In the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 90103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. It is determined whether or not the starting opening switch 9022A is turned on (step S90201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 9022A is turned on (step S90201; Yes), the first special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is set (step S90202). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to "1" (step S90203).

Normally, when the first starting opening switch 9022A is off in step S90201 (step S90201; No), and when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 906B, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 9022B is on ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 9022B is turned on (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure pending storage number, which is the pending storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S90205). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit in step S90205 (step S90205; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to "2" (step S90206).

After performing either of the processing of steps S90203 and S90206, the special figure reservation storage number corresponding to the starting mouth buffer value which is the value stored in the starting mouth buffer is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second holding storage count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90208). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

After executing the processing of step S90208, the CPU 90103 selects, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 and the random counter of the RAM 90102, the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value for determining the jackpot type. Numerical data indicating MR2′ is extracted (step S90209). Random value MR1' for determining the special figure display result, whether or not the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game is controlled as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result is set as a "small hit" to be small. It is a random number value used to determine whether to control the winning gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65535", for example. The random number MR2′ for determining the jackpot type is determined to be one of “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, and “probability” for the jackpot type which is the variable display mode of the decorative pattern when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random number value used to do this, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “99”, for example. By executing the processing of step S90209, the CPU 90103 displays numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time. Extract. In this embodiment, the random number value MR1′ and the random number value MR2′ are extracted in the process of step S90209, but as described above, the random number value MR2′ is used to determine the jackpot type. Since it is a random number value, it may be extracted only when the determination result of the random number value MR1′ is “big hit”. In this case, the random number value MR2' may be extracted after the determination of Yes is made in step S90241 of FIG. 33 described later.

Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1′ and MR2′ are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A as shown in FIG. When the mouth buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1' and MR2' are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B as shown in FIG. 32(B).

The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A shown in FIG. 32(A), the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A, and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. However, the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) which has not been started is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the winning number into the first starting winning opening (the order in which the game balls are detected) with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game balls. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 stores, as the reserved data, the predetermined number of stored data such as the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like and the random number value MR2′ for determining the jackpot type, etc. It is stored until the upper limit value (eg, “4”) is reached. The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B shown in FIG. 32B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is given. The pending data of the special figure game that has occurred but has not been started yet (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B associates the winning number in the second starting winning opening (the order in which the game balls are detected) with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game balls. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 uses the numerical value data such as the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type, which are extracted from the random number circuit 90104 and the like, as the pending data, and the number thereof is predetermined. It is stored until the upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data thus stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

In addition, withholding information (first withholding information) based on establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening, and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. ..

Subsequent to the processing of step S90210 shown in FIG. 31, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (step S90211). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. To send to 9012 the first start winning combination designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 904A has been established Set. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. , The setting for transmitting the second start mouth prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 904B is established .. The starting mouth winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by, for example, executing a predetermined command control processing after the special symbol process processing is completed.

After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 90101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the first special figure reservation storage number for the effect control board 9012. The setting is made to transmit either the first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the number of the second reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number (step S90212). The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by, for example, executing a predetermined command control processing after the special symbol process processing is completed. It should be noted that a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

After executing the processing of step S90212, it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S90213). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S90213; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90214), and then step S90204. Go to processing. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S90213; "2"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90215). The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting port switch 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the effective game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 of FIG. 30, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 90151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 90151B. The display device 904B determines whether or not to start the special drawing game. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special symbol display result. , (Determined in advance) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B (big hit symbol or Either a small hit pattern or a lost pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined.

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3′ for determining a variation pattern, based on a result of predetermination of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes processing for determining the pattern as one of a plurality of types. The random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “1” to It takes a value in the range of "251". When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal process of step S90110 and the variation pattern setting process of step S90111, the variation pattern including the variable display time of the fixed special symbol or the special symbol and the decorative symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process or the variation pattern setting process uses the random number MR1′ for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2′ for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern, and the special symbol. It also includes processing for determining the variable display mode of the decorative pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in 1st special design display 904A and the 2nd special design display 904B, and the elapsed time since that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. For example, each time the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value that is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the RAM 90102 is subtracted from or added to 1, and the first special symbol display device. Regardless of whether it is a special drawing game using the first special drawing in 904A or a special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 904B, the elapsed time can be measured by a common timer. Done. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. The variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure may be controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol (deriving). It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is turned on. If the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". Further, the special symbol stop process of step S90113 includes a process of determining the end of the time saving state, and in the case of ending, performing a setting of transmitting a command to that effect to the effect control board 9012 side. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 by the command control processing described above).

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., there is processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and set the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probability". As an example, in response to the big hit type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to "15 times", the setting for the normal open big hit state may be performed. On the other hand, in response to the jackpot type "Sudden", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening, which is the maximum number of times to execute the round, is set. By setting “15 times” to, it is sufficient to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, after the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". .. In addition, the big hit open process in step S90115 includes a process of setting to transmit a prize ball command indicating that a game ball has been detected by the count switch 9023 to the effect control board 9012 side. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control processing described above).

The big hit opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum value, or reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, processing for making settings for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. When the number of executions of the round does not reach the maximum winning opening maximum number, the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum reaches the maximum, The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In the big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. Includes processing to wait until the time has passed, processing to perform various settings (start setting of the probability variation state and time saving state) to start the probability variation control and time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state, etc. There is. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the result that the variable display result is "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set as in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and set the number of times of opening the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hitting open process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

The small hit ending process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In this small hit completion processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, and the like. It includes the process of waiting until the time elapses. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the state of the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is not changed, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hitting game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 30 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S90231). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the process of step S90231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 90102 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the number of second special figure reservation storages other than "0" is determined in step S90231 (step S90231; No), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and a random number value MR2′ for determining the jackpot type are read out as data (step S90232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step S90232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updated, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1' to MR3' stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 90151B are higher by one entry at a time. To (step S90233). Further, in the processing of step S90233, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter in the RAM 90102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S90235). The 1st special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure with the 1st special design indicator 904A. For example, in the process of step S90235, the first pending storage number count value stored in the first pending storage number counter may be read from the RAM 90102, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be used. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls have entered (passed) and the starting winnings have occurred. In this case, a table that stores data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only needs to be decided.

In step S90235, when the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" (step S90235; No), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A corresponding to the reservation number "1" is reserved. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result and a random number value MR2′ for determining the big hit type are read out as data (step S90236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updated, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. In the section 90151A, the reservation data indicating the random number values MR1′ and MR2′ stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are moved upward by one entry. It shifts (step S90237). Further, in the process of step S90237, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter in the RAM 90102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

After performing any of the processing of steps S90234, S90238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, is a "big hit" or "miss", it changes. The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S90239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 34A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. 34B is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 90103 may select the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state.

The first special symbol display result determination table 90130A is a variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1' for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state Is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision. The second special figure display result determination table 90130B is the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1' for determining the special figure display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state Is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision.

In the first special map display result determination table 90130A, the special map is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). A numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1′ for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the special state display result determination disorder is determined according to whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state) or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1' is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the table data indicating the decision value to be compared with the random value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result is the special figure display result “ It is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state as "big hit". In each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the game state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values than the times are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special map display result is set as "big hit" as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). The probability of being determined to control the state increases. In other words, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probable variation state, compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, when the variable display result is determined based on that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied, In the case where the variable display result is determined based on the satisfaction of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, the special figure display result is displayed. The proportion determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state as "small hit" can be made different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hitting game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a certain variation In the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, such as the state (high-accurate high-base state), frequent occurrence of the small hitting game state where it is difficult to obtain the winning ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B as well, a determined value within a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A is assigned to the "small hit" special figure display result. Good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a smaller determination value than that in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, when the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability changing state is lower than the normal base state or the low base state such as the probability changing state without time saving, the proportion determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state is lower. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table.

Following the processing of step S90239 shown in FIG. 33, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1′ for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss”. By comparing with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit" or "miss" (step S90240).

Since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state is selected in step S90239, in the process of step S90240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a certain change state. Whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" is determined by using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B is The table data corresponding to the normal state or the time saving state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1′ is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probability change state, the game state in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B is The table data corresponding to the case of the probability variation state is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1′ is determined with reference to this.

After the special figure display result is determined in step S90240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S90241). Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (step S90241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 35 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (step S90243).

The jackpot type determination table 90131 determines the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the jackpot type determination random number MR2′ when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special map display result being “jack”. It is a table that is referred to in order to do. In the jackpot type determination table 90131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A) or the second special symbol (second symbol). The numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR2' for determining the big hit type is "non-probable variation", "probable variation", or "probability" depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 904B. It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 90131, the assignment of the determined value to the jackpot type of “probability” differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, the determined special value (value in the range of “82” to “99”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”, while the fluctuation special map is Is the second special figure, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied. And when determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied With, it is possible to make the jackpot type "probably" determined differently. In particular, in the special drawing game using the second special drawing, it is not decided that the big hit type is set to "probable" and the short-term open big hit state is controlled. In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by 906B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of short-term open big hit state where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

Even in the case where the variation special map is the second special figure, the determined value in the predetermined range different from the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. Good. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that when the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type of “avoidance”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table 90131 set in step S90243 shown in FIG. 33, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number MR2′ stored in the variation random number buffer is changed to “indeterminate change”, Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each of the “probable variation” and the “probability”, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90244).

By determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S90244, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is either one of the time saving state and the probability variation state which is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state. Whether or not to control is determined before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (step S90245), the jackpot type thus determined is stored. As an example, if the big hit type is "non-probable change", the big hit type buffer value may be "0", if it is "probable change", it may be "1", and if it is "probable", it may be "2".

When it is determined in step S90241 that it is not the "big hit" (step S90241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "small hit" (step S90246). When it is determined that the "small hit" is made (step S90246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90247).

If it is determined in step S90246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S90246; No), after performing any of the processing of steps S90245 and S90247, whether to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Predetermination result of whether or not, further, corresponding to the determination result of the big hit type in the case of a big hit gaming state, set a special special symbol (step S90248). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not “small hit” in step S90246, the special pattern display result is a lost symbol corresponding to the pre-determined result of “miss”. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is "small hit", the small hit is made in correspondence with the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "small hit". The special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in step S90241, the big hit symbols "3", "5", and "7" are obtained according to the big hit type determination result in step S90244. "One of the special symbols indicating the number" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", the special symbol showing the number "3" which is the normal jackpot symbol among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "probable variation", a special symbol showing the number "7" which is a probable variation jackpot symbol in the normally open round jackpot symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol. According to the result of the determination that the jackpot type is "actual", the special symbol indicating the number "5" which is a short-term open jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S90248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and the special symbol normal process is ended. .. If the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S90250), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 905 is produced from the main board 9011. It is determined whether it has been transmitted to the board 9012. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90111 of FIG. 30 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is on (step S90261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 37(A) is selected as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern as one of a plurality of types. It is set (step S90262). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the RAM 90102, it is specified whether the big hit type is "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probability" (step S90263).

When it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is "big hit", the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A determines the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type, and the random value MR3' for determining the variation pattern. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types based on. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, a numerical value (3) to be compared with the random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, or “probability”. (Determined value) is a fluctuation pattern PA4'-1, fluctuation pattern PB4'-1, fluctuation pattern PB4'-2, fluctuation pattern PB5'-1 to fluctuation pattern PB5'-4, and fluctuation pattern PC1'-1 to fluctuation pattern It is assigned to any of PC1'-2.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern such that the proportion determined by each variation pattern varies depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. .. For example, the variation pattern PA4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-2, and variation pattern PB5'-1 to 1, depending on whether the jackpot type is "indeterminate variation" or "probability variation". The determination values are assigned differently to the variation pattern PB5′-4. This makes it possible to change the proportion of the same variation pattern determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types of big hits.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which a determination value is assigned to different variation patterns depending on which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation” or “probable variation”, the variation pattern PA4′-1, variation pattern PB4′-1, variation pattern PB4′-2 and variation pattern PB5′-1 to variation pattern PB5. While the determined value is assigned to “-4”, the determined value is not assigned to the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-2. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable”, the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-2, while the variation pattern PA4′-1, No determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PB4′-1, variation pattern PB4′-2, and variation pattern PB5′-1 to variation pattern PB5′-4. As a result, when the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to "short hit open big hit state", a variation pattern different from that of the normal open big hit state is determined. be able to.

When the jackpot type is determined to be “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, or “probability”, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the probable variation state, or the time saving state. Thus, the allocation of the decision value to each variation pattern may be different. As a result, it is possible to change the rate of determining the same variation pattern depending on which of the plurality of types the gaming state is. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be either “non-probable variation”, “probable variation”, or “probability”, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the probable variation state, or the time saving state. Thus, the determined value may be assigned to different variation patterns. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined according to which of the plurality of types the gaming state is. In this embodiment, more determination values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4′-1 indicating the variation pattern of normal reach when the jackpot type is “non-determined variation” than when the jackpot type is “determined variation”. There is. Therefore, when the reach effect of super reach is executed, the jackpot type is more likely to be a “probable change” than a “non-probable change”, so that the player can have expectations. The interest can be improved. Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 37(A), more determination values are assigned to the variation pattern for performing the reach effect of super reach B than for the variation pattern for achieving the reach effect of super reach A. ing.

When the big hit flag is off in step S90261 shown in FIG. 36 (step S90261; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S90264). If the small hit flag is on (step S90264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B shown in FIG. 37(B) is selected as the use table for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns. And set (step S90265).

When the small hit flag is off in step S90264 (step S90264; No), the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C shown in FIG. 37C is used as a usage table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns. It is selected and set (step S90267). For example, by determining whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 90102 is ON, it is specified whether the gaming state is in the time saving control in which the time saving control is performed in the probability changing state or the time saving state (step S90268). ).

The loss variation pattern determination table 90132C determines the variation pattern among a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3′ for determining the variation pattern when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “miss”. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, the determined values are varied so that the rate determined for each variation pattern is different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving control in the definite variation state or the time-saving state. There is a part assigned to the pattern. As a result, the rate of determination of the same variation pattern can be made different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, or the time variation control during the probability variation state or the time reduction state. With the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, there is a portion where determination values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving control is performed in the probability variation state or the time-saving state. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the probability variation state or the time saving control in the time saving state. Note that in the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A of FIG. 37A, more determinations are made than the determination values assigned to the variation patterns that perform the reach effect of super reach. Values are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. Therefore, when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A of FIG. 37(A), a variation in which the reach effect of the super reach B is performed rather than a variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach A is performed. Decision values are assigned so that there are fewer patterns. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a big hit when the reach effect is performed is higher in the super reach B than in the super reach A. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention also to the type of reach effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

After performing any one of the processes of steps S90263, S90265, and S90268 shown in FIG. By referring to the variation pattern determination table set in the table, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90269). Here, in the processing of step S90269, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the satisfaction of the first start condition is determined. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B based on the satisfaction of the second start condition, By using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3′ for determining the fluctuation pattern, which is updated by the common random counter or the like, the common processing module can determine the fluctuation pattern into any of a plurality of types.

When the big hit flag is on, table data corresponding to the big hit type specified by the process of step S90263 is selected from the table data forming the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 90132A, and a random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is selected. It is only necessary to be able to determine the fluctuation pattern to which the decision value corresponding to the numerical data indicating'is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine one of the variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result that the special figure display result is “big hit”.

When the small hit flag is on, it is sufficient to refer to the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B and determine the variation pattern to which the determined value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3' for determining the variation pattern is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine a variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result that the special figure display result is “small hit”.

When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step S90269, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach". That is, the process of step S90269 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “miss”.

After the variation pattern is determined in step S90269, the special figure variation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S90270). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is.

After executing the processing of step S90270, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. The setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special figure games using the figure (step S90271). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 904B is performed.

Following the processing of step S90271, settings are made for transmitting various commands that are used when the special symbols start changing (step S90272). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 causes the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 to enter a game state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 90101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the RAM 90102. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special diagram designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 causes the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 to enter a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

Here, the first fluctuation start command is a command for designating fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. The second variation start command is a command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. The gaming state designation command is a command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Based on the command transmission setting in step S90272, every time a predetermined command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is finished, the main board 9011 sends a game state designation command to the effect control board 9012, the first command. The fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command. The game state designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S90273), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing executed in step S90113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special symbol finalized display flag provided in the RAM 90102 is on (step S90291). Here, the special figure finalized display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S90295, which will be described later, in response to the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

In step S90291, when the special figure finalized display flag is off (step S90291; No), setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol is performed (step S90292). At this time, the setting for transmitting the decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90293). Further, a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S90294). For example, in the process of step S90294, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the special figure fixed display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 90102. Then, the special symbol finalized display flag is set to the on state (step S90295), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. Thus, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed by the processing of step S90292, until the special symbol confirmation display time set in step S90294 elapses, the special symbol is processed in the special symbol process process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S90291 that the special figure finalized display flag is on.

When the special figure finalization display flag is ON in step S90291 (step S90291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure finalization display time has elapsed (step S90296). For example, in the process of step S90296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer whose timer initial value has been set by the process of step S90294 is read, and whether or not that timer value has become "0" Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. The game control process timer value is updated so that if the timer value is a value other than "0", it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Good. If the special figure finalization display time has not elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; No), the special symbol stop processing is ended, and the special figure finalization display time is waited.

When the special figure finalization display time has elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; Yes), the special figure finalization display flag is cleared and turned off (step S90297), and then it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. It is determined (step S90298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S90298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the big hit start effect waiting time (step S90299). In addition, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90300). For example, in the process of step S90300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the hit start designation command according to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area designated by the pointer.

Following the processing of step S90300, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step S90301). Also, settings are made to end the probability variation state and the time saving state (step S90302). For example, as the processing of step S90302, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to turn them off, processing for clearing the time saving counter for counting the number of remaining special figure games executed during high base, etc. Should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S90303), the special symbol stop processing is ended.

When the big hit flag is off in step S90298 (step S90298; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S90304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S90304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the small hit start effect waiting time (step S90305). Then, the main board 9011 is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 9012 with a hit start designation command corresponding to the fact that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S90306). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to be turned off (step S90307). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S90308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S90304 (step S90304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S90309). After performing either of the processes of steps S90308 and S90309, it is determined whether or not the time saving control or the high opening control in the high base is ended (step S90311), and when it is ended (step S90311; Yes), while ending the time saving control and the high opening control and the like, and after setting to send the time saving ending command indicating the end of the time saving state (step S90312), the special symbol stop processing is ended. On the other hand, when not ending (step S90311; No), the special symbol stop processing is ended as it is. For example, in the process of step S90311, when the time saving flag is on, the time saving count value stored in the time saving counter is updated by, for example, subtracting 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated hour/hour count value matches a predetermined hour/hour end determination value (for example, “0”). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, the time saving control and the high opening control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time saving flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, the state of the time saving flag may be maintained and the special symbol stop processing may be ended. Even when the gaming state is the probability changing state, if the time saving flag is on, it may be determined whether or not to end the time saving control, and the time saving control may be ended based on the result of the determination. While the time saving control is ended in this manner, the probability variation control may be continued until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" next time, or until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times. As a result, the gaming state can be in the latent probability changing state. For the probability variation state in which the time saving flag is ON and the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving control is continuously performed until the next variable display result is "big hit".

Further, in the processing of step S90311, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for the probability variation control end determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, and the probability variation control end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90101 or the like is referred to. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation control, for example, when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S90311, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result is "big hit".

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 39. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 shown in FIG. 39 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 90122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 9012. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9072; No), it stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I/O 90125, a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 is a control signal to be a production control command. Take in. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 90122. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S9073), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

After executing the command analysis processing in step S9074, it is determined whether an abnormal command is received from the main board 9011 side (step S9075). The abnormal command is related to winning, for example, by pretending to be a winning when not actually winning (more specifically, a winning is detected in a variable winning device that is not actually opened). This command is transmitted when at least one of a plurality of abnormalities such as an abnormality (winning abnormality) or an abnormality caused by the upper and lower plates being filled with game balls (abnormal dish) is detected. As the abnormal command, a command corresponding to each of a plurality of abnormalities is transmitted from the main board 9011 side. When it is determined that the abnormality command is received (step S9075; Yes), abnormality notification processing is executed to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred (step S9076). In the abnormality notification process, for example, a process of displaying a message indicating which type of abnormality has occurred on the image display device, lighting a lamp, or outputting a sound may be performed. Although described in detail later, in this embodiment, the process of step S9076 makes it possible to execute the abnormality notification at any timing by receiving the abnormality command, and an icon as a special display is displayed. The abnormality can be notified within a predetermined period after the notification that the error has occurred.

After executing the processing of step S9076 or when it is determined that the abnormal command is not received in step S9075 (step S9075; No), it is determined whether or not the effect setting is performed by the player (step S9077). .. In the process of step S9077, for example, it is determined whether or not a player does not operate an effect setting button (not shown) by checking whether or not it has been detected by a sensor that detects an operation action of the player. When it is determined that the effect setting has been performed (step S9077; Yes), effect setting processing is performed (step S9078). In the process of step S9078, since the production setting button is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the production performed, the type of the music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 905, and the game effect lamp. It suffices to change the effect-related settings such as the brightness settings of various lamps such as 909. Note that, for example, which effect setting to change may be selectable from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed in accordance with a change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do it. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in this embodiment, by the process of step S9078, the setting related to the effect can be executed at any timing due to the player's operation, and as a special display, It is possible to set the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed. Specifically, the process of step S9078 can be executed at any timing, such as during demo display, during variable display, during big hit game control. Note that the process of step S9078 may be disabled during the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (for example, 0.1 seconds). Specifically, the process of step S9078 may be prohibited during the period from the reception of the symbol confirmation command to the reception of the fluctuation start command.

After performing the process of step S9078, or when it is determined that the effect setting is not performed in step S9077 (step S9077; No), the effect control process process is executed (step S9079). In the effect control process process of step S9079, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, an operation of outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation of a decorative light-emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, With respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, such as the drive operation in the production model, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the production control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

Following the effect control process processing, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S9080), and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 are generated by software as various random number values used for effect control. Update. Then, the process returns to step S9072.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing performed in step S9079 of FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122 or the like. To do.

The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 9011 is received, and whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 905 is started. It includes a process for determining.

The variable display start setting process of step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. In order to perform variable display execution settings and other various staging operations, it includes processing to determine the fixed decorative design and various staging control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special design and the type of display result. .. Also, in the variable display start setting process, the special display effect execution setting in which special images such as icons are displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage, and advantageous states such as cut-in notice and step-up notice Execution setting of a notice effect as an effect suggesting that control is performed is performed. Note that the degree of advantage to the player is, for example, a state that is actually advantageous to the player when a certain event occurs (a state in which a privilege is given, or a state in which the privilege is given, or a state where the rate of giving a privilege is high). , A ratio of being in an advantageous state different from the privilege) or a ratio of being in an advantageous state. In addition, the privilege that is shown to be highly likely to be given by the special mode may be the same as the object of the advantage to the player (advantageous state), and is different from the object of the advantage to the player. It may be one. Further, the special display effect in this embodiment is an effect in which special images such as icons as the special display are displayed step by step according to the degree of advantage. For example, the special display is a variable display. It may be a display corresponding to (active display) or a meter display, and it can be used in various types of production, such as one in which the display mode of the active display is changed step by step or one in which the meter display is increased step by step. You can That is, the concept of gradual change of special display is that a special image such as an icon is displayed step by step, the mode of active display is changed step by step, and the meter display is increased (or decreased). For example.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 90122, and various values during variable display of the decorative pattern. Effect control. Further, in the variable display effect production process, a special display effect and a notice effect are executed. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Corresponding to, etc., the fixed decorative design as the final stopped design which is the variable display result of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command When the time has elapsed, the variable display result can be confirmed by autonomously deriving and displaying the fixed decorative pattern on the side of the effect control board 9012 without depending on the effect control command from the main board 9011. When the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure winning waiting process of step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the winning start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit medium effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0". In addition, in the special figure hit waiting processing of step S90173, when the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state except for "probability", the above-described big hit middle promotion effect execution setting processing is included. ing.

The effect process during small hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. The game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the decoration LED is executed. In addition, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting finish production in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011. ..

The small hit end production process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit completion effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and an effect image based on the setting contents is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. The game effect lamp 909 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013 and outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control at the end of the small hitting game state such as turning on/off/blinking the decoration LED is executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

The big hit mid-hit effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit medium effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014, the game effect lamp 909 or decoration Various effect control in the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED for use is executed. In addition, in the big hit midfield effect process, control for executing a big hit midpoint promotion effect and notification effect is performed. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 9011, for example.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and causes an effect image based on the setting contents to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. By outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013 to output sound or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014, a game effect lamp 909 or for decoration Various effect control at the end of the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED is executed.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90171 of FIG. 40 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011, and the special figure display result is “missed”. It is determined whether or not (step S90551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “miss” (step S90551; Yes), the specified fluctuation pattern is read by, for example, reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 9011. Determines whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" (step S90552).

When it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination is determined (step S90553). As an example, in the processing of step S90553, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left confirmed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined left confirmed stored in the ROM 90121 or the like is determined. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 among the fixed decorative designs is determined. Next, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, and referring to a predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. With this, the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined. At this time, it may be determined such that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative design is different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative design by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-determined symbol determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. By this, the middle fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 among the fixed decorative designs is determined.

When it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; No), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which is the final stop symbol forming the reach combination is determined (step S90554). As an example, in the process of step S90554, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left/right fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined right/left fixed in advance stored in the ROM 90121 or the like is determined. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 among the fixed decorative symbols are the same. Determine the decorative pattern of. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-determined symbol determination, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, and referring to a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. Of the finalized decorative designs, the middle finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, in the case where the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, for example, when the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. (For example, "1") may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design so that the fixed decorative design does not become a big hit combination but becomes a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, the difference between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design (symbol difference) is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the design difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S90551 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (step S90551; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is "small hit" or "probability" (step S90555). ). When it is determined to be a "small hit" or a "probability" (step S90555; Yes), for example, a final decorative pattern which is a final stop design corresponding to a "small hit" or a "probability" such as the opening chance. The combination is determined (step S90557). As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a final stop symbol that constitutes any one of a plurality of types of opening chances and The combination of confirmed decorative patterns is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for chance chance determination, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, it is only necessary to determine the combination of the fixed decorative patterns forming any of the opening chance eyes.

When it is determined in step S525 that the "non-probable change" or "probable change" is other than "small hit" (step S90555; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S90556). As an example, in the process of step S90556, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random counter of the RAM 90122 is extracted, and subsequently, a predetermined jackpot confirmed symbol previously stored in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the determination table or the like, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the screen of the image display device 905 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern.

As a specific example, regardless of whether the jackpot type is “non-probable variation” or “probable variation”, in the process of step S90556, one of the decorative symbols is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols. It is only necessary to select and determine the fixed decorative pattern that constitutes the big hit combination.

After performing any of the processing of step S90553, step S90554, step S90556, and step S90557, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the execution of the special display effect in which special images such as icons are displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage. A special display effect execution setting process for performing is performed (step S90559).

42 is a flowchart showing an example of the special display effect execution setting process performed in step S90559 of FIG. In the special display effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the special display effect (step S90601). Specifically, in the process of step S90601, the presence/absence of execution of the special display effect is determined by referring to the special display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 43(A).

FIG. 43A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the special display effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not the special display effect is executed is set to the illustrated determination ratio according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set such that the ratio of the variable display result being a “big hit” is higher when the special display effect is executed than when the special display effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the special display effect is executed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate is different depending on whether it is a super-reach big hit or a normal reach big hit. If the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determined proportion may be different depending on the variation pattern.

Returning to FIG. 42, after executing the process of step S90601, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the special display effect in step S90601 (step S90602). When it is determined not to execute the special display effect (step S90602; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the special display effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the special display effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution mode of the special display effect (step S90603). Specifically, in the process of step S90603, the execution mode of the special display effect is determined to be any one of a plurality of modes with reference to the special display effect execution mode determination table shown in FIG. 43(B).

FIG. 43B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the special display effect execution mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the types of special display effects such as “Pattern A”, “Pattern B”, and “Pattern C” are set in this embodiment, and the variable display result is set. Accordingly, the determined proportion is set. Specifically, the "pattern A" mode is a mode in which a star-shaped icon is displayed, and the "pattern B" mode is a mode in which a star-shaped icon and a triangular icon are displayed. The mode of “C” is a mode in which a star icon, a triangular icon, and a round icon are displayed. In the special display effect execution mode determination table in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the mode of "pattern B" is more preferable than the mode of "pattern A" is the mode of "pattern C" than the mode of "pattern B". , The determined proportion is set so that the variable display result will be a "big hit" when it is executed (that is, the proportion that the more icons are displayed is the "big hit") Is set so that is higher). Therefore, the development destination differs depending on which icon is displayed, and the player can pay attention to which icon is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in the figure, three types of modes of “pattern A” to “pattern C” are shown, but there is a mode in which only a triangular icon is displayed or a mode in which only a round icon is displayed. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of times of execution of the special display effect is one (only whether or not to execute is determined in step S90601 of FIG. 42), but the special display effect is executed a plurality of times. (The larger the number of executions, the higher the proportion of “big hits”), and in that case, one type of icon may be displayed each time it is executed (FIG. 42). The number of times of execution may be determined in step S90601, and an aspect corresponding to the variation pattern and the number of times may be determined in the process of step S90603). Furthermore, even if the number of displayed icons is the same, the proportion of "big hits" may be different depending on the combination of displayed icons (that is, the icons to be displayed according to the variable display result). Combinations may be determined in different proportions).

Returning to FIG. 42, after performing the processing of step S90603, the effect control CPU 90120 does not perform the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, but does the pseudo-continuous gaze variation pattern (PB3′-1, PB3 shown in FIG. 28. '-2, PB5'-1, PB5'-2) is determined by checking the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 side (step S90604). When it is determined that the variation pattern is not the pseudo continuous variation (step S90604; No), that is, when the variation pattern is the pseudo continuous variation or is not the pseudo continuous variation pattern, the execution timing determination table illustrated in FIG. The execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to 1 (step S90605), and the special display effect execution setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is the pseudo continuous gaze (step S90604; Yes), the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 44(B) (step S90606). , The special display effect execution setting process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, it is assumed that a maximum of one pseudo-repeated variation is performed (one re-variation), but the variable display effect of “pseudo-ream” is used. The number of times of the pseudo continuous variation may be set to be able to be executed more than once, for example, twice or three times. In that case, in step S90604 of FIG. If it is determined whether or not the effect is performed, and when the failure effect is executed, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the special display effect. Good (the execution timing may be determined by referring to the execution timing determination table in which the timing of superimposition is not selectable).

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the special display effect. FIG. 44A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 1 which is referred to when the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation or is not a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, and FIG. , A configuration example of the execution timing determination table 2 that is referred to in the case of the pseudo continuous gaze variation pattern is shown. In the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 44(A), three types of timings such as “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set as the determination timings, and the determination rates shown in the figure are set. Note that "timing 1" to "timing 3" shown in FIG. 44(A) are execution timings set in advance according to the variation pattern. For example, even if the execution timing is the same "timing 2", the variation The timing is different for each pattern. All the execution timings of “timing 1” to “timing 3” may be set to different timings according to the variation pattern. For example, the execution timing of “timing 1” may be set to a common execution timing regardless of the variation pattern. Good. On the other hand, in the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 44(B), two types of timings such as “timing 1” and “timing 3” are set as the determination timings, and the determination rates shown in the figure are set. .. As will be described later in detail, the execution timing of "timing 2" is set to the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed, and the other "timing 1" and "timing 1" The execution timing of "timing 3" is set to an execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interconnection effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap with each other (see FIG. 46). In the illustrated example, three types of timings, “timing 1” to “timing 3”, are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in each execution timing determination table. ..

Here, the special display effect and its execution timing will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing details of the special display effect. As shown in FIG. 45, when the special display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect that suggests whether or not to display an icon as a special display (see FIGS. 52(b) to (e)), and when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success, a special effect is displayed. The special display change notification for notifying that the icon as the display is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and then the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. (Special display changes). Then, the special display effect ends. In this embodiment, the special display change notification is continuously given for a predetermined period, and then the special display is changed. However, the special display change notification is continuously given for the predetermined period of 10 seconds. It may not be performed, for example, it may be continuously performed for 6 seconds, and the special display change notification may not be performed for the remaining 4 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the failure effect or the notice effect is limited for a predetermined period after being notified that the icon is displayed, but the special display change notification is continuously executed for the predetermined period. As described above, the time period may be a production time period or a time period counted by a timer such as 10 seconds. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 45, the case where the effect result of the predetermined effect shows success is shown (in the present embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the effect result of the predetermined effect always shows success. However, in this case, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed), and if the special display effect is finished as it is, the result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure. Good. The process of step S90601 of FIG. 42 determines whether or not to execute such a special display effect. In the case where the production result of the predetermined effect also includes failure, the mode of executing the predetermined effect indicating failure may be selectable in the process of step S90603 shown in FIG. 42.

FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the special display effect. FIG. 46(A) shows the execution timing of the special display effect in the case of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gas, and FIG. 46(B) shows the case of the variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous gas, in which the pseudo continuous variation is The execution timing of the special display effect at the time of the variation pattern to be performed is shown. FIG. 46(C) shows a case of a variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous gaze, and specifically shows the execution timing of the special display effect in the case of the variation pattern of non-reach loss. In the illustrated example, the non-reach-miss variation pattern is shown, and the other variation patterns are not shown, but in the case of other variation patterns, as described above, for each variation pattern, "Timing 1" to "timing 3" are preset. As shown in FIG. 46(A), in the case of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gaze, the pseudo continuous attraction effect to be executed is a failure effect. As described above, in the special display effect, after the result indicating success is displayed as the effect result of the predetermined effect, the special display change notification for notifying that the icon as the special display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it will be advantageous to the player. Nevertheless, if a failure production is subsequently performed as a pseudo-enhancement production, the player will be discouraged and the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the case of the variation pattern of pseudo continuous gaze, the execution timing of the special display effect is the execution of "timing 2" in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous attraction effect and the execution period of the special display effect are overlapped. Timing is not selectable. Therefore, in the process of step S90606 of FIG. 42, the execution timing of the special timing is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. doing. As a result, the execution of the failure effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed is notified, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is prevented. When determining the execution timing when the special display effect is executed a plurality of times with the pseudo continuous gaze variation pattern, a plurality of timings are selected from the execution timings other than “timing 2” in the process of step S90606 of FIG. do it. Further, when the result of the predetermined effect in the special display effect indicates failure, the execution timing of "timing 2" may be selectable because the above situation does not occur (FIG. 46(B) described later). the same as). On the other hand, even when the result of the predetermined effect in the special display effect indicates failure, the execution timing of “timing 2” is not selectable, and it is notified that the icon is not displayed (the predetermined effect as the mini game. It may be possible to prevent the failure effect from being performed in a predetermined period after the result of (1) ends in failure. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the result of the predetermined effect ends in failure and the failure effect is further executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interconnection effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed is not selectable, and it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed. Although an example is shown in which the execution of the failure effect is prohibited in a predetermined period after that, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-enhancement effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the special display effect may be selected may be selectable. In that case, the failure effect may be executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a display smaller than that in the normal time or a transparent display. Further, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous production (failure production) and the execution period of the special display production are overlapped is not made unselectable, and is determined, for example, by a determination ratio of 1% or 2%. The ratio may be limited by making it extremely low as compared with the case where no failure effect is performed. That is, the restriction on the execution of the failure effect includes not only the case where it is not executed but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the case where it is executed at an extremely low rate. In addition, the execution timing of "timing 2" in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution period of the special display effect are made selectable, and when "timing 2" is determined, "timing 2" and "timing 2" are selected. By performing the process of shifting the execution timing of the special display effect at a timing such as "timing 2.5" which is the execution timing between "timing 3", the pseudo after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed It may be possible to limit the failure production as a continuous production.

Further, for example, when the execution timing of the special display effect is determined as "timing 1" as shown in FIG. 46(A), the failure effect is subsequently performed as the pseudo-interconnection effect after a certain period has elapsed. Therefore, the discouragement of the player can be alleviated to some extent. However, in order to prevent the player from becoming more discouraged, in the case of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous gas, “timing 1” and “timing 2” cannot be selected, that is, before the execution period of the pseudo continuous production. The set timing may not be selectable (the failure effect is limited during the period after the icon as the special display is displayed). According to this, since the execution of the failure effect is limited after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed is notified, it is possible to further prevent the amusement of the game from being deteriorated. It should be noted that while “timing 2” is not selectable, the determination rate for determining “timing 1” may be set to 1% or 2%, or an extremely low determination rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(B), in the case of a variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation is performed, the pseudo continuous production is a successful production. Therefore, the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and it is suggested that the player is advantageous, and then the failure effect is executed, so that the player is not disappointed. Therefore, as shown in the figure, as the execution timing of the special display effect, the execution timing of "timing 2" in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution period of the special display effect are overlapped can be selected. That is, in the process of step S90605 of FIG. 42, the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 44A including the execution timing of “timing 2”. Further, as shown in FIG. 46(C), similarly, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern as well, in the process of step S90605 of FIG. 42, the execution timing of “timing 2” is shown in FIG. 44(A). Although the execution timing of the special display effect is determined by referring to the execution timing determination table 1, the execution timing of "timing 1" is compared with the case of the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation shown in FIG. 46(B) is performed. Is common timing (for example, timing 2 seconds after the start of variable display), the execution timings of "timing 2" and "timing 3" are different. As described above, by providing the execution timing different from the common execution timing according to the variation pattern, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Note that, as shown in FIG. 46C, the special display effect can be executed even with the variation pattern for performing the pseudo continuous variation and the variation pattern for the pseudo continuous variation. According to this, since the pseudo-interconnection effect is not executed in the first place in the predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game enjoyment. When determining the execution timing when the special display effect is executed a plurality of times in the variation pattern for performing the pseudo continuous variation (in the variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous variation), in the process of step S90605 of FIG. It is sufficient to select a plurality of timings from all the execution timings from "to timing 3". Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B (the same applies to a variation pattern that is a reach instead of a pseudo-relation variation pattern), the execution timing of the special display effect is the timing before the reach. A special display effect may be executed in the middle. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous variation may be one or more times, one special display effect may be performed for each variation including the initial variation, or in one variation including the initial variation. The special display effect may be performed multiple times. In addition, when the special display effect is performed a plurality of times, the number of icons that are displayed stepwise increases (for example, when the special display effect is performed three times in total, one icon is displayed in one special display effect). It is displayed, and finally three icons are displayed), so that it becomes a mode in which the degree of advantage is high.

Returning to FIG. 41, after executing the special display effect execution setting process of step S90559, the effect control CPU 90120 gives advance notice such as a cut-in advance notice or a step-up advance notice that gives a notice as to whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit”. A notice effect execution setting process for setting effect execution settings is performed (step S90560).

47 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect execution setting process performed in step S90560 of FIG. In the advance notice effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (step S90901). Specifically, in the process of step S90901, the presence/absence of execution of the notice effect is determined with reference to the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the description and facilitate understanding, a cut-in notice is executed as the notice effect, but other types of notice effects may be executed. Different types of notice effects may be executed according to the variable display result.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the notice effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice effect is set to the illustrated determination rate according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determined ratio is set such that the ratio of the variable display result of "big hit" is higher when the notice effect is executed than when the notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the notice effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 47, after executing the process of step S90901, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the notice effect in step S90901 (step S90902). When it is determined not to execute the notice effect (step S90902; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the notice effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the notice effect (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the special display effect execution setting is made in the special display effect execution setting process in step S90560 of FIG. Yes (step S90904). When it is determined that the execution setting of the special display effect is not made (step S90904; No), the execution timing of the advance effect is determined by referring to the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. The setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution setting of the special display effect is set (step S90904; Yes), any one of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIGS. 49B to 49D. Is referred to according to the execution timing of the special display effect, and the execution timing of the notice effect is determined. Then, the notice effect execution setting process ends.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the notice effect. FIG. 49A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table A that is referred to when the special display effect is not executed. In the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 49(A), four types of timings such as “timing A” to “timing D” are set and are set to the illustrated determination rate. FIGS. 49B to 49D show configuration examples of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D that are referred to when the special display effect is executed. Specifically, the execution timing determination table B is a table referred to when the special display effect is executed at the timing of "timing 1", and the execution timing determination table C is the special display effect of "timing 2". The execution timing determination table D is a table that is referred to when it is executed at a timing, and the execution timing determination table D is a table that is referred to when the special display effect is executed at a timing of "timing 3". In each of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D, the execution timing of the notice effect is set such that the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed cannot be selected (FIG. reference). In the illustrated example, four types of timings “timing A” to “timing D” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in the respective execution timing determination tables. .. Further, in the illustrated example, the execution timing is determined irrespective of the variable display result, but for example, the variable display may be performed so that the later the execution timing is, the higher the ratio of the variable display result is "big hit". The execution timing determined according to the result may be different (on the contrary, the earlier the execution timing, the higher the proportion of “big hit” may be). According to this, the player's attention can also be paid to the timing at which the notice production is executed.

Note that the example shown in FIG. 49 shows an example in which each of the execution timing determination table B to the execution timing determination table D is prepared in advance according to the execution timing of the special display effect, but FIG. 49(A). From the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 4, a determination table in which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not selectable is created in the process of step S90906 in FIG. 47 to determine the execution timing. You may According to this, the capacity can be reduced.

Subsequently, the execution timing of the special display effect and the notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed. When the special display effect is not executed, any execution timing may be determined from all the execution timings such as “timing A” to “timing D” illustrated (see FIG. 49(A)). Further, the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 50 shows an example in the case where an error occurs at the timing or the player sets the effect, and the description thereof is omitted here. Note that a case where an error occurs at the timing of “X” and a case where the player makes an effect setting will be described later. Further, as described above, even when the special display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed. ), since the special display effect ends, the execution timing of the notice effect may be determined from all the execution timings such as "timing A" to "timing D".

Specifically, FIG. 50A is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed at “timing 1” in FIG. 44 (see FIG. 46). As illustrated, when the special display effect is executed at "timing 1", any timing of "timing B" to "timing D" other than "timing A" is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect (" Timing A” is not selectable). That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the advance notice effect with reference to the execution timing determination table B shown in FIG. 49B in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the illustrated example, the execution timing of "timing B" is a timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect and the execution period of the notice effect overlap, and "timing B" is also selected as the execution timing of the notice effect. Although it is possible, in this case, the execution timing of “timing B” may not be selectable. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each effect. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 50(A), an example in which the failure effect is executed as the pseudo-interconnection effect is shown, but the same applies to the case where the success effect is executed. Similarly to the case of determining the execution timing of the special display effect, "timing B" can be selected as the execution timing of the notice effect when executing the success effect, and "timing B" when executing the failure effect. "Cannot be selected (when the timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is determined as the execution timing, it may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the special display effect) ..

FIG. 50(B) is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed at “timing 2” in FIG. 44 (see FIG. 46). As shown in the figure, when the special display effect is executed at "timing 2", any one of "timing A", "timing C" and "timing D" other than "timing B" is the execution timing of the notice effect. (“Timing B” cannot be selected). That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the notice effect by referring to the execution timing determination table C shown in FIG. 49C in the process of step S90906 of FIG. In the illustrated example, the end timing of the special display effect and the end timing of the pseudo continuous effect are the same timing, but this is an example and may be different timings.

FIG. 50C is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed at “timing 3” in FIG. 44 (see FIG. 46 ). As shown in the figure, when the special display effect is executed at "timing 3", any one of "timing A", "timing B", and "timing D" other than "timing C" is the execution timing of the notice effect. (“Timing C” cannot be selected). That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the notice effect by referring to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIG. 49D in the process of step S90906 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, the execution timing of “timing D” is set as an execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap. That is, the execution timing of the "timing D" is a commonly selectable execution timing regardless of the execution timing of the special display effect. Therefore, the notice is executed at a common timing regardless of whether the special display effect is executed at a timing corresponding to the execution timing of the special display effect (or even when the special display effect is not executed). There is a case where the effect is executed, and the range of the effect can be expanded.

As described above, in the special display effect, after the result indicating success is displayed as the effect result of the predetermined effect, the special display change notification for notifying that the icon as the special display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that it will be advantageous to the player. Nevertheless, if the notice effect is executed within a predetermined period from the notification that the icon is displayed to the display of the icon (the special display changes), the effect of the special display effect decreases. Will end up. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, and to prevent the effect from decreasing. In this embodiment, the execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect overlap is not selectable, and a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed is notified. Although an example of prohibiting the execution of the notice effect is shown, the execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superposed may be selectable, in which case a display smaller than the normal time or The notice effect may be executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as by displaying it transparently. That is, the restriction on the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case where it is not executed but also the case where it is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Further, as described above, even when the special display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed. ), since the special display effect is finished as it is, the phenomenon that the effect of the special display effect is lowered does not occur. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to make the execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect overlap not selectable (the execution of the notice effect need not be restricted).

Returning to FIG. 41, after executing the advance notice effect execution setting process of step S90560, the effect control CPU 90120 executes other effects such as, for example, an effect that fuels whether or not to reach, or an advance notification of a chance to be performed in the reach state. Whether or not to perform, and other effect settings for determining the type of effect to be executed are set, and an effect control pattern to be used pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90561). The effect control CPU 90120 stores a plurality of pre-stored and prepared ROMs 90121 corresponding to, for example, a variation pattern designated by a variation pattern designation command, a special display effect or a notice effect determined in steps S90559 and S90560. One of the effect control patterns may be selected and set as the use pattern. Subsequently, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (the effect control timer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 90122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command (step S90562).

Then, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90563). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90561 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, the image display device 905 The variation of the decorative design may be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided in the display area. After executing the process of step S90563, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90564), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

51 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S90172 of FIG. 40 as the variable display effect process. When the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 51 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like, whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed. (Step S90801). For example, when the production control CPU 90120 updates (for example, subtracts 1) the timer value of the production control process timer, and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value, etc. First, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90801; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is a special display effect period in which the special display effect is executed (step S90802). ). If the special display effect period is predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in accordance with the presence/absence and timing of execution of the special display effect in the process of step S90559 of FIG. 41. Good.

When it is determined that it is the special display effect period (step S90802; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control of the special display effect (step S90803). Thereby, the special display effect is executed. Specifically, in the process of step S90803, as described above, the special effect as the mini game is performed, and after the success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect, the special display is informed that the icon is displayed as the special display. The display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the icon in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. 42 is displayed (the special display changes). If the effect of the predetermined effect indicates failure, special display change notification may not be performed after the predetermined effect indicating failure is performed in the process of step S90803 (unless the icon is displayed. ).

After executing the process of step S90803, or when determining in step S90802 that it is not the special display effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the effect effect period for executing the effect effect. It is determined (step S90802). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in accordance with the presence/absence of execution of the notice effect and the timing being determined in the process of step S90560 of FIG. When it is determined that it is the notice effect period (step S90804; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the notice control of the notice effect (step S90805). As a result, the notice production is executed.

After executing the process of step S90805, or when determining in step S90804 that it is not the notice effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S90806). The reach production period may be predetermined in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern, for example. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step S90806; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs control for executing the reach effect, such as displaying a background image for the reach effect (step S90807).

After execution of the process of step S90807, or when it is determined in step S90806 that the reach effect period is not reached (step S90806; No), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the effect control pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern. Based on the other control, control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern is performed (step S90808), and the variable display effect processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S90801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step S90809; No), the variable display effect process is terminated and stands by.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S90809 (step S90809; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display controller 90123, for example. In the variable display of the symbols, control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S90810). Then, a predetermined fixed time is set as the big hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S90811). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the special figure winning waiting process (step S90812), and ends the variable display effect effect process.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the special display effect and the failure effect as the pseudo-interconnection effect are executed. Specifically, an example of the effect operation when the special display effect is performed at the execution timing of "timing 1" shown in FIG. 46(A), and then the pseudo effect of failure effect effect is performed is shown. When the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 52A, a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a special display effect is started as shown in FIG. 52B. In the illustrated example, a mode in which the character appears as the predetermined effect and the success is achieved by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined effect, but there are a plurality of modes other than the predetermined effect. You can Further, as a result of the predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above.

Then, when the predetermined effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 52(c) to 52(d) and success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 52(e), FIG. As shown, the fact that the icon is displayed as the special display change notification is notified (the special display change notification is executed). The special display change notification is continued for a predetermined period. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period of time, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, since the mode of “pattern A” is shown, a star icon is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 52(h), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L and 905R, and as shown in FIG. 52(i), “middle” In the decorative pattern display area 905C, the pseudo continuous production effect is performed to check whether or not the "re" mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as the pseudo continuous chance pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(j), a failure effect is executed as the pseudo continuous attraction effect, and the "re" mark as the pseudo continuous chance symbol is in the reach state without the temporary stop display. Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the reach state is set after the pseudo continuous production (failure production), the reach state may not be set after the failure production. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52(j), the display position of the icon display as the special display is moved, but the display position may not be moved. At this time, the display priority may or may not be given priority to the icon display.

In this way, when the failure effect is executed as the pseudo-enhancement effect, the timing at which the execution period of the failure effect does not overlap with the execution period of the special display effect is determined as the execution timing of the special display effect. The execution period of and the execution period of failure production do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's discouragement due to the failure effect being performed after being notified that the icon as the special display is displayed (changed), and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game. It should be noted that, instead of setting the execution period of the failure effect and the timing at which the execution period do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect, the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period do not overlap may be set as the execution timing of the failure effect. .. That is, instead of adjusting the execution timing of the special display effect, the execution timing of the failure effect may be adjusted. Specifically, one execution timing of the failure effect may be selected from a plurality of timings set in advance so that the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the failure effect do not overlap each other.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the special display effect and the success effect as the pseudo-interconnection effect are executed. Specifically, an example of the effect operation when the special display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 2” illustrated in FIG. 46(B) and the pseudo effect of successive effect is performed is shown. Note that FIGS. 53A to 53F are the same as FIGS. 52A to 52F, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 53, since the successful effect is performed as the pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous effect is executed even after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(g), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L and 905R, and as shown in FIG. A pseudo continuous production effect is executed to determine whether or not the "re" mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pseudo continuous chance pattern in the decorative pattern display area 905C. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(i), the success effect is executed as the pseudo continuous attraction effect, and the "re" mark as the pseudo continuous chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, when the change is performed again and a predetermined period of time has passed, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. 53(j). In the example shown in the figure, the icon as the special display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed during the change again. May be Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(h), a predetermined period may elapse during execution of the pseudo-interaction effect, and an icon display as a special display may be performed. In addition, when the success effect is performed as the pseudo continuous effect and the special display effect is performed, the lapse timing of the predetermined period may be the same timing as the end timing of the pseudo continuous effect. Further, the end timing of the pseudo continuous effect and the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be independently determined. In this way, when the success effect is executed as the pseudo-interconnection effect, the situation in which the player is not discouraged does not occur. Therefore, the execution period of the pseudo-interconnection effect and the execution period of the special display effect are overlapped. Can be determined as the execution timing of the specific effect.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation when the special display effect and the notice effect are executed. Specifically, an example of the effect operation when the special display effect is performed at the execution timing of "timing 1" shown in FIG. 50(A) and the notice effect is subsequently performed at the execution timing of "timing B" is shown. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 50(A), the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the pseudo-interaction effect overlap each other, but in the example shown in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate understanding, An example of the effect operation of the pseudo continuous effect is omitted.

When the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 54(a), a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a special display effect is started as shown in FIG. 54(b). In the illustrated example, a mode in which the character appears as the predetermined effect and the success is achieved by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined effect, but there are a plurality of modes other than the predetermined effect. You can Further, as a result of the predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above. Then, when the predetermined effect proceeds as shown in FIGS. 54(c) to 54(d) and success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 54(e), FIG. As shown, the fact that the icon is displayed as the special display change notification is notified (the special display change notification is executed). The special display change notification is continued for a predetermined period. Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, since the mode of “pattern A” is shown, a star icon is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(h), a cut-in notice is given as a notice effect. In addition to the illustrated example, a different form of cut-in notice may be executed depending on the proportion of the "big hit". In addition to the cut-in notice, a step-up notice or a battle effect may be given. You may

In this way, when the special display effect is executed, the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. The production execution period does not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the advance production being performed during a predetermined period after being notified that the icon as the special display is displayed (changed). ..

FIG. 55 shows an example of the effect operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing "X" shown in FIG. Specifically, from the main board 9011 side, an abnormal command indicating that a prize has been detected for a variable winning device that is not actually opened (a prize error) is displayed at an "X" timing (shown in FIG. 50). An example in the case of receiving at a timing after the special display change notification in the special display effect) is shown. As shown in FIG. 55(a), if the abnormal command is received at the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 50 after the special display change notification, the abnormal command is received in step S9075 shown in FIG. The determination is made, and the abnormality notification processing is performed in the processing of step S9076. Then, as a result of the processing, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the abnormality notification is performed in a mode according to the type of the abnormal command received (in the example shown, an example of displaying a message of "winning abnormality occurs!" is shown. However, other than that, a warning sound or a lamp may be turned on, and a different mode of notification may be given according to the preset importance of abnormality). Then, after the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes) as shown in FIG. 55(c). In the illustrated example, the abnormality notification is erased at the timing of FIG. 55(c), but the abnormality notification may be continuously performed until the operation of canceling the abnormality notification is performed. May be. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to notify the abnormality even within the predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (changed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

FIG. 56 shows an example of the effect operation when the player makes effect settings at the timing “X” shown in FIG. Specifically, an example in which the player performs an operation to increase the volume of the effect at the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 50 (timing after the special display change notification in the special display effect). Showing. As shown in FIG. 56(a), after the special display change notification is made, when the effect setting is made at the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 50 (when the operation by the player is detected), it is shown in FIG. It is determined that the effect setting is performed in step S9077, and the effect setting process is performed in the process of step S9078. Then, by the processing, it is notified that the volume setting has been changed as shown in FIG. 56B (in the example shown, the volume has been changed from "6" to "7") (setting change notification). ), the process of increasing the volume output by the effect is performed. Then, after the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes) as shown in FIG. 55(c). As shown in the figure, it is desirable that the notification that the volume setting has been changed is displayed in such a manner that the special display change notification or the special display cannot be recognized by the player. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform the effect setting even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (changed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the effect. When the abnormality notification and the setting change notification are performed in the same period, the abnormality notification may be prioritized (eg, the layer of the abnormality notification may be set to be closer to the player than the layer of the setting change). .. Furthermore, depending on the type of abnormality, some may be prioritized over the setting change notification and some may not be prioritized.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the following effects can be achieved.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines, as the execution timing of the special display effect, a timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap. Therefore, the execution of the failure effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display is changed) is prevented, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is prevented. Further, the timing set before the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect may not be selectable as the execution timing of the special display effect, whereby the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes. Since the execution of the failure effect is limited after the notification that "Yes" is performed, it is possible to further prevent the game enjoyment from being deteriorated. Further, when the special display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed, and when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success, a special display change for notifying that an icon for the special display is displayed The notification is continuously given for a predetermined period, and then the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 of FIG. 42 (the special display changes). The effect control CPU 90120 determines, as the execution timing of the special display effect, a timing at which the execution period of the failure effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap. Therefore, the execution of the failure effect is limited during the period from the time when success is shown as the effect result of the predetermined effect until the icon is displayed (the special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Further, when performing the special display effect, effect control CPU 90120 determines the icon (combination of icons) to be displayed at a different ratio according to the variable display result. Therefore, the player can pay attention to which icon is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution time of the notice effect. Therefore, the execution of the notice effect is limited in a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display is changed) can be restricted, and the deterioration of the effect can be prevented. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 90120 can perform effect-related settings within a predetermined period after being notified that an icon as a special display will be displayed (the special display will change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the effect. Moreover, when the setting related to the effect is performed, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that the setting related to the effect has been changed (setting change notification). Therefore, the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and one described in the above-described embodiment can solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may have a partial structure. Further, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, the predetermined effect as the mini game has been described as always indicating success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the predetermined effect of the mode shown in FIG. 52 or the like is performed is shown, but there may be a plurality of modes of the predetermined effect. For example, as shown in FIG. May compete with each other (perform a race effect). FIG. 57 shows an example of the effect operation when the race effect is performed as the predetermined effect. Specifically, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a degree of expectation as to whether or not the predetermined performance is successful. There are blue, green, red, and rainbow as the colors of each runner. The success expectation is high in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue, and the race production is the character of two runners with different success expectations (here , Which is distinguished by the color) performs a race (race), and either one wins so that the success or failure of the predetermined performance is notified (the success expectation of the winning runner is Be notified as a jackpot expectation). Note that the race effect may be performed multiple times. The green and blue runners, which have relatively low success expectations as a result of the predetermined effect, belong to the first group, and the rainbow and red runners, which have relatively high success expectations as a result of the predetermined effect, belong to the second group. Shall belong. The race effect is an effect that allows one of the runners to win, and is also a type of selection effect that selects one of the runners. Further, in the race production, both runners who appear may cancel the race (a mode in which neither runner is selected).

In this example, the ratio of both runners canceling the race in the race effect in which at least one of the blue runner and the green runner belonging to the first group in which the success degree of success of the predetermined effect is relatively low appears (first stop ratio) 57), a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group with a relatively high success expectation of the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 57 appears (that is, blue and green belonging to the first group). In the race production where no runners appear, the ratio of both runners stopping the race (second stop ratio) is set higher. Accordingly, even when the success degree of success of the predetermined effect is low, the race effect in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be executed, and the effect can be enhanced. In particular, the ratio of "miss" is usually higher than the ratio of "big hit" in the variable display result, and the result of the predetermined effect often ends in failure (assuming that the special display effect is executed). In many cases, the performance result of the specified performance also ends in failure.) Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the race performance in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear, and the player Since it is expected that the success expectation of the predetermined production is high every time the race production in which the runner and the rainbow runner appear is executed, the production effect can be enhanced. When a selection effect such as a race effect (as described above, a race effect is a kind of selection effect) is executed, conventionally, when an option is not selected from the presented options (runner color). , A production with a high degree of expectation of success (high degree of expectation), which is not usually selected, was executed. However, as described above, since the variable display result is rarely a "big hit" in general, the result as the predetermined effect is often unsuccessful. Therefore, the player comes into contact with the high-expectation effect. This is rare, and the effect of production is not enhanced. Therefore, due to the above-mentioned race effects (effects in which both runners cancel) and the relationship between the first cancellation ratio and the second cancellation ratio, high expectations are suggested (red runners and rainbow runners appear. Because the race effect) is easily executed, the effect of the effect is enhanced.

In addition, in this example, the above-mentioned race effect is executed as an example of the predetermined effect as the mini game and the effect for notifying the success expectation degree of the predetermined effect is shown as an example, but the race effect is not the predetermined effect in the special display effect. Alternatively, it may be executed as an effect of notifying the big hit expectation degree of the variable display being executed (the effect of notifying the big hit expectation degree of the winning runner as the present big hit expectation degree). According to this, it is possible to execute a race effect in which the red runners and the rainbow runners belonging to the second group, which have a relatively high jackpot expectation, appear even in the variable display with a low jackpot expectation. Can be increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which an icon as a special image is displayed as a special display effect has been shown, but in addition to the icon being displayed as a special display effect, as described above, a meter is used as a special display effect. You may perform the effect which changes a display (increases in steps). Further, an effect (active display change effect) of changing the active display mode corresponding to the variable display in accordance with the special display effect may be performed. Further, during the reach effect of super reach (super reach effect), the active display mode and the special display mode may be changed to the special mode. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. Specifically, in the active display change effect in this example, the display modes of the active display are changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)” and “third mode”. It is only necessary that the display can be changed to "mode (red)". When the final display mode of the meter display as the special display is "first stage" or "second stage", the final display mode of the active display is "first mode (blue)", and the meter display When the final display mode of "is the 3rd stage" or "4th stage", the final display mode of the active display is "2nd mode (green)", and the final display mode of the meter display is "10th stage". In the case of "stage", the final display mode of active display is "third mode (red)".

In FIG. 58, the special display effect is performed, the meter display is changed from the normal mode to the display mode of the first stage, and the active display change effect is performed in which the active display is changed to the first mode according to the change of the meter display. The example of the production operation when it is performed is shown. As shown in FIG. 58A, when variable display of a decorative pattern is started in the image display device 905, active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 58A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 58(B), when the special display effect is executed, the effect of blinking the meter display 9090 is executed as the predetermined effect. Then, the character A 90200 appears (FIG. 58(C)), and the display mode of the meter display changes to the display mode of the first stage in which the color of one scale of 10 has changed (FIG. 58(D)). Then, in accordance with the change in the meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. 58(E), the color is shown by letters) and displayed (FIG. 58( E)).

Next, specific examples of the super reach effect, the special display effect, and the active display change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. Of these, FIG. 59 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach effect is executed independently (the special display effect and the active display change effect are not executed). In addition, FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 show an example of the effect operation when the special display effect and the active display change effect are executed when the super reach effect is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, a case where the super reach effect is independently executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 59A, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 59(A), the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), after the "left" decorative design is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the "right" decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the left and right decorative designs are displayed. Indicates that the same symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed, and the reach state occurs. Next, at the timing of development into super reach, a character display such as "Super reach!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 59(D), and racing of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 59(E). Such effect display is started, and super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 59D to 59G, in this embodiment, during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of effect symbols is reduced and displayed at the lower right end of the display screen of the image display device 905. It shall be.

Next, at a predetermined cut-in effect execution timing during execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the predetermined cut-in effect is executed during execution of the super reach effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 59(F), in the image display device 905, a predetermined character image 90201 different from the effect display of the racing of the racing car up to that time is cut in, and a dialogue such as "chance!" A predetermined cut-in effect is executed according to the display mode. In this example, the predetermined cut-in effect is a part of the super reach effect. Note that, for example, as in the above embodiment, the predetermined cut-in effect may be configured as an effect different from the super reach effect. Further, for example, the super reach effect may be interrupted and a predetermined cut-in effect may be executed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 59(A), even when the super reach effect is executed independently, the meter display 9090 is also displayed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. However, when the predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter display 9090 is erased as shown in FIG. 59(F). As such, in this example, the meter display 9090 is displayed at least until the predetermined cut-in effect is started. Therefore, the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect and the meter for changing the special display mode to the special mode are displayed. It is possible to make it impossible to recognize which of the predetermined cut-in effect and the special change of the meter display is executed until the execution timing of the special change of the display (detailed later). It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the meter display changes due to a special change. Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the meter display 9090 may be continuously displayed even after the predetermined cut-in effect is started (however, the meter level does not change). Further, for example, when the super reach effect is executed independently and the special change of the meter display or the active display change effect is not executed, the meter display 9090 may not be displayed.

Next, when a predetermined cut-in effect execution period elapses, the effect display of the racing of the racing car is returned to again, and as shown in FIG. 59(G), an effect as if the racing car of the teammate finished the first place. Display. Then, when the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the same symbol as the decorative symbol on the left and right (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed as the "middle" decorative symbol, and the jackpot symbol is hit. Is derived and displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, a case where a special change of meter display and an active display change effect are executed as the special display effect when the super reach effect is executed will be described. In the examples of FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the special change of the meter display is executed as the special display effect, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the display mode of the tenth stage, and the active display changes to the third mode in accordance with the change of the meter display. In addition, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display of the third special display mode. In the special display effect, normally, as shown in FIG. 58D, the display mode of the meter display changes to the display mode of the first stage in which the color of one scale of 10 has changed. When the special change of the meter display is executed, the normal mode is changed to the display mode of the tenth stage. In this way, the special change of the meter display in the special display effect is called a special change effect.

As shown in FIG. 60A, when variable display of a decorative pattern is started in the image display device 905, active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 60A, active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the "left" decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 60(B), the "right" decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 60(C), and "left" and "right" are displayed. The decorative pattern of “” is stopped and displayed with the same design (design “7” in this example), and the reach state occurs. Next, at the timing of development into super-reach, a character display such as "Super-reach!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 60(D), and racing of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 60(E). Such effect display is started, and super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 60(D) to (I) and FIG. 61(J), in this example, during execution of the super reach effect and during execution of the special change effect, the right side of the display screen of the image display device 905. The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced at the lower end. Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), just before the special display effect is started, the notification effect of blinking the meter display 9090 is executed.

Next, after the start of the super reach effect, at the execution timing of the special change effect as the special display effect, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the special change effect is executed in the image display device 905 in such a manner as to perform an effect display as if a storm has arrived and a thunder is ringing. In this example, the special change effect is different from the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(H), in the image display device 905, an effect display as if a lightning strike hits the meter display 9090, and the display mode of the meter display as the special display is 10. The display mode changes to the tenth stage display mode in which the colors of all of the scales have changed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 60(H), the example in which the display mode in the 10th stage is changed in which the colors of all the scales are changed is shown, but the display mode in the 10th stage may not be changed at once. For example, while suspending the super reach effect or executing it in a layer with low priority, perform a dedicated mini game effect for changing the display mode, and change to any stage depending on the result of the mini game effect. You may make it different. Further, the display mode may be changed stepwise by continuously performing the mini game production.

Then, the super reach effect is restarted, and as shown in FIG. 60(I), the effect display of the race of the racing car is returned to again, and the display mode of the active display is the third mode (FIG. In the example of 60(I), the color is indicated by a character). Next, as shown in FIG. 61(J), an effect display as if the teammate's racing car finished in 1st place was performed, and the meter display and the active display were the special display of the third special display mode (“V”). It is changed to a special display 202) indicating the character of. Then, when the variable display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 61(K), the same design as the production design on the left and right (in this example, the design "7") is stopped and displayed as a "medium" decorative design, and the jackpot pattern is displayed. Is derived and displayed.

In this example, a racing car race effect is displayed as a super reach effect, a predetermined character image 90201 is cut in as a predetermined cut-in effect, and a storm comes and a thunder strikes as a special change effect. The case of performing the effect display as if it is ringing is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a super reach effect, a battle effect such as a battle between an enemy character and an ally character may be performed, or a moving image of a predetermined story may be displayed, and various effect modes are possible. Further, for example, a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be executed as the predetermined cut-in effect, and a display different from the effect display until then during the super reach effect may be cut in in some form. .. Further, for example, as a special change effect, an effect display in which a character different from the meter display change effect appears may be performed, or a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be executed, and various effect modes are possible.

According to this, it is possible to display a display (in this example, a meter display) that indicates the degree of expectation by changing the mode in a plurality of stages as a special display. In addition, when a specific effect (in this example, super reach effect) is executed, a special change effect (in this example, a special change in the meter display in the special display effect) for changing the special display mode can be executed. Is. Further, in this case, the special change effect can be executed in a manner prior to the specific effect (in this example, the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed). Therefore, the special display mode can be changed in a mode prioritizing the specific effect, so that the change in the special display mode can be noticed even when the specific effect is executed. That is, if both the specific effect and the change of the special display mode are executed, the player may pay attention to the specific effect and may not be able to sufficiently pay attention to the change of the special display mode, but the priority is given to the special effect. Since the aspect of the special display can be changed according to the aspect described above, it is possible to pay attention to the change of the aspect of the special display even when the specific effect is executed. In addition, in this example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the meter display (incrementally increasing) is executed as the special display effect, and the active display change effect is performed in accordance with the special display effect. Instead of this, the icon shown in the above embodiment may be displayed. For example, when the icons are displayed in stages, a special change of the meter display is executed as the special display effect, and when the normal mode is changed to the display mode of the 10th step, the active display is changed to the third display mode. Instead of being changed and displayed in the mode (in the example of FIG. 60(I), the color is shown by letters), the icon is displayed in the mode at the highest stage (mode with the highest jackpot expectation). May be.

In this example, the display mode of the active display changes according to the change of the meter display. However, for example, the display mode of any of the hold displays changes according to the change of the meter display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it may be realized by associating and executing the pre-reading effect and the special display effect (including the special change effect) for changing the display mode of the hold display based on the command at the time of winning the start prize. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the time of starting winning, and the effect is executed based on the determination result. Further, in the case where the display mode of any of the hold displays changes corresponding to the meter display, a special display effect (from the time when the hold display is displayed to the start of the corresponding variable display ( (Including special change effects) may be executable.

Further, for example, if the display mode of the hold display is changeable by the prefetch effect, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode becomes active depending on the display mode. The display may be displayed. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circle display). .. Further, in this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change of the meter display, and the active display succeeding the display mode of the hold display may change according to the further change of the meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined based on the command at the time of the start winning, or may be determined in the variable display start setting process. Good. Further, in this case, the special display effect (including the special change effect) may be allowed to be executed during the period from the time when the hold display is displayed until the corresponding variable display ends.

Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to set the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed, and the volume of the effect is changed as an example of the setting related to the effect. However, the setting relating to the effect is not limited to this. The setting relating to the effect may be performed as long as it is performed based on the operation by the player, and for example, the selection of the music to be output or the type of the background may be changed. Further, the setting regarding the effect may include setting the function of the auto button to be valid or invalid.

The “auto button” is a function that executes the process assuming that the push button 9031B is operated, although the push button 9031B is not actually operated by the player. In this example, the button advance notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the advance notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single-shot operation or the repeated hitting operation of the push button 9031B in the button advance notice effect. When the function is set to be valid, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the push button 9031B is executed as if the push button 9031B is operated in a single-shot operation or a repeated hit operation in the button notice effect, and the notice display is displayed. .. In this example, the single-shot operation means that the push button 9031B is operated once, and the continuous hitting operation means that the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times.

Further, in this embodiment, “automatic continuous hit” means that the push button 9031B is actually continuously pressed (long-pressed) by the player. However, the push button 9031B is pressed multiple times. This is a function of detecting that the button is continuously pressed (continuously pressed (a state in which the push button 9031B is pressed and a state in which the push button 9031B is not pressed is repeated a plurality of times)). In this example, when the function of the auto button is invalid, the notice display may be displayed based on the detection of the repeated hitting operation of the push button 9031B in the button notice effect, but the push button 9031B is pressed for a long time. Also in this case, the notice display is displayed as if the repeated hit operation was detected.

In this example, by performing the effect setting process of step S9078 of FIG. 39, arbitrary timing (for example, a period during the customer waiting demonstration display or a period during which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed, during the big hit game) During a certain period), it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button based on the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 56, the player has changed the volume setting at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 50, but instead of the volume setting, the function of the auto button is enabled as the effect setting. It is also possible to set whether or not to set. That is, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button within a predetermined period after being notified that the icon as the special display is displayed. It should be noted that it is possible to display whether the auto button is valid or invalid within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. Note that, in this example, the automatic continuous hitting function is always valid, but it may be configured to be enabled or disabled like the function of the automatic button.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the function of the auto button is set to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 62, the modes of the display screen transit in the order of (1), (2), and (3). Note that, in the case of FIG. 62(1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is disabled. As shown in FIG. 62(1), when the player performs a long press operation of the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, as shown in FIG. 62(2), the auto button is pressed. While the function is set to be valid, a character string such as "auto button enabled" is displayed on the image display device 905, and a message indicating that the function of the auto button is set to valid is displayed. At this time, control for outputting the auto button effective sound effect from the speakers 908L, 908R and control for causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the special light emission mode may be performed.

Further, when the player presses the push button 9031B (single-shot operation) while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is disabled as shown in FIG. 62(3). And a character string such as “auto button disabled” is displayed on the image display device 905, and a message indicating that the auto button function is disabled is displayed. At this time, control for outputting the automatic button invalid sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R and control for causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode may be performed.

In the example of FIG. 62, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, but as described above, by performing the same operation, not only during the variable display of the decorative pattern, The setting of the auto button function can be changed even during the customer waiting demonstration period and the big hit game period. Note that, for example, even when the setting of the auto button function is changed from the menu screen, similar to the example shown in FIG. 62, a display indicating that the auto button function is disabled or enabled is displayed on the image display device 905. Control to output the auto button invalid sound effect or the auto button effective sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and to control the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode or the special light emission mode. May be.

Next, a difference between a case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by a long press operation and a case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by an auto button function will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation and automatic continuous hitting by an automatic button function. In the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that execution of the button advance notice effect A is determined as the button advance notice effect.

In the "button notice effect A" and "button notice effect B", when the operation valid period is started, a gauge display corresponding to the number of times the push button 9031B is operated is displayed, and the operation of the push button 9031B is detected. Each time, the display is updated so that the scale of the gauge display is decreased by one. Then, when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number (that is, when the scale on the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied, and an advance notice is displayed (for example, "Extreme heat!" or "Chance!" Character string) is displayed.

When the function of the auto button is invalid and the execution of the button advance notice effect A is determined, when the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button advance notice effect, the long press operation is started. After 4 seconds have elapsed, the detection by the automatic repeated hits is started, and during the detection by the automatic repeated hits, it is treated that the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased by 1 every 1.0 seconds. In addition, when the execution of the button advance notice effect B is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button advance notice effect, the automatic operation is performed when 2 seconds have elapsed after the long press operation was started. The detection by repeated hits is started, and during the detection by automatic continuous hits, it is treated as the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased by one every 0.5 seconds. It should be noted that regardless of whether the button advance notice effect A or the button advance notice effect B is executed, when the normal continuous hit operation of the push button 9031B is performed, each time the push operation of the push button 9031B is detected. It is treated as if the number of operations was increased by one.

Further, if the function of the auto button is valid, when the button notice effect A is executed, 1.0 second has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period even if the push button 9031B is not long pressed. Each time the push button 9031B is operated, the number of operations is increased by one. When the button notice effect B is executed, even if the push button 9031B is not pressed for a long time, the number of times the push button 9031B is operated every 0.5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period. It is treated as one increment. Further, as will be described later in detail, when the button advance notice effect C is executed, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, a predetermined timing in the middle of the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period is 6 seconds). Is reached, it is treated as if the push button 9031B has been operated once.

Note that, for example, the automatic continuous hitting start time and the automatic continuous hitting detection period may be selected from a plurality of options at different rates depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the auto continuous hit start time is determined to be 0 seconds at a rate of 50% and 2 seconds at a rate of 50%. May be determined to be 0 seconds at a rate of 70% and 2 seconds at a rate of 30%. When the variable display result is "big hit", the automatic continuous hit detection interval is determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 70% and 1 second at a rate of 30%. In this case, 50% may be set to 0.5 seconds and 50% may be set to 1 second. In addition, depending on whether or not the variable display result is "big hit", the automatic continuous hit start time and the automatic continuous hit detection period can be selected from different options at different rates. It may be applied to only one of the automatic continuous hits by, or may be applied to both.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63(A), in the case where automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed, a predetermined start waiting period after the long press operation of the push button 31 is started after the start of the operation valid period. After (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed, the continuous stroke determination is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous stroke operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63(B), when the automatic continuous hitting by the auto button function is performed, the continuous hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the operation valid period (that is, the operation valid period Immediately after the start, the process is executed as if the continuous stroke operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced). With this configuration, when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display is reduced. ) Can be performed at different timings, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In addition, in this example, when the execution of the button advance notice effect B is determined, when the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed, the long press operation of the push button 9031B is performed after the start of the operation valid period. If the continuous hit determination is turned on after the lapse of a predetermined start standby period (2 seconds in this example) after the start, and if automatic continuous hits are performed by the auto button function, the continuous hits are immediately performed after the start of the operation valid period. Judgment turns on. Therefore, in each of the button notice effects A and B, the effect is produced depending on whether the automatic button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed or when the automatic button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. The timing (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display) is configured to be different.

In the above embodiment, for easy understanding, the predetermined effect as the mini game is described as always indicating success, but the effect result of the predetermined effect may indicate failure, and execution of the predetermined effect may be performed. The ratio of the success of the effect of the predetermined effect may be different depending on the timing. Specifically, since the execution timing of the predetermined effect differs depending on the execution timing of the special display effect, it suffices that the rate at which the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success varies depending on the execution timing of the special display effect. In addition, for example, even when the special display effect is executed at the execution timing of "timing 1" shown in FIG. 46, there may be a plurality of execution timings of the predetermined effect, and the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The proportion of the success of the effect result may be changed according to the above. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the start timing of the predetermined effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the ratio of the variable display result being a “big hit” varies depending on the combination of the icons displayed as the special display, but this is an example. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display and a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the active display and the hold display, and the special mode The ratio of the "big hit" in the variable display result may be different depending on the combination with the display mode (the number or combination of icons) of the display. According to this, the effect of production can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, by determining the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect, the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display is Although an example is shown in which the execution of the notice effect is limited in a predetermined period after being notified that it changes, for example, although the notice effect is limited, the jackpot expectation of one-shot notification is extremely high (here , "Big hit" confirmed) Special effects can be executed, and the special effects are not limited even in a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes). Good. In this case, regarding the execution timing of the special effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 49A, the execution of the special effect is referred to by referring to a table in which the timing overlapping the execution period of the special display effect is not selectable. The timing may be determined from a plurality of timings. Note that the special effect may be an effect in which the hold display is changed by the operation of the player, in addition to the one-time notification. According to this, the effect which is limited and the effect which is not so are clearly attached, and the effect can be improved. In addition, the example of restriction of execution of the notice effect includes a case of not executing (prohibiting) and a case of being executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In order to execute the notice production without prohibiting it, if the icon display as the special display is given priority over the notice production (for example, the icon display layer is set to the player side over the notice production layer). Good. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty visually recognizing the special display and improve the effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the abnormality notification is possible within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed is notified, but this is an example. In addition to the abnormality notification, it suffices that information about the game such as a hitting notification, a ball notification, and a fourth symbol can be appropriately notified as special notification. It should be noted that the payout notification displays the number of balls (the number of acquired balls) acquired by the player in a recognizable manner, and the special notification may be updated each time the number of acquired balls increases. Usually, the number of coins won is displayed during high base and updated after a big hit, so it is updated within a predetermined period after being notified that an icon as a special display will be displayed. Although not performed, the number of coins to be won may be updated for payout due to a game ball winning a winning opening during a high base, which is applicable in such a case. Further, the present invention is also applicable to a gaming machine in which the variable display result is frequently set to "small hit" during a high base to increase the number of coins to be won by the player. According to this, it is possible to update the acquired payout number within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed, and it is possible to suitably notify the player of the acquired payout number. .. Note that the hitting notification may be any notification such as a right hitting notification or a left hitting notification, as long as the player can recognize the area in which the game ball is shot. Further, the fourth symbol may be, for example, one that displays by blinking a lamp so that the player can recognize whether or not the display is variable.

In the above embodiment, one variation pattern command is issued at the start of variation in order to notify the variation control pattern 9012 of the variation time and the variation pattern indicating the type of reach production, the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, and the like. Although the example of transmitting is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to determine the presence or absence of pseudo-relationship, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. before reaching (so-called when the reach does not occur. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (so-called the first when the reach is not reached). It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the variation time or variation mode after 2 stops). In this case, the effect control board 9012 side may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variation time by each of two commands, and the effect control board 9012 selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt (In) the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of each segment that is not limited to numbers or symbols are provided. An example of variable display is shown. However, the variable display results and the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". It is not limited to the ones composed of the like. For example, the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and at least a part of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol). What alternates and is also included in the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during the variable display and the special symbol displayed as the variable display result may be different. As a variable display of the special symbol, for example, a display of blinking "-" is performed, and as a variable display result, other special symbols ("7" for "big hit", "1" for "miss", etc.) ) Is included in the variable display of special symbols. In addition, blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative design is also included in the variable display of decorative design. The lighting pattern in the variable display of the normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least a part of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost design) Alternately repeating is also included in the variable display of ordinary symbols. Further, the decorative design or the normal design displayed during the variable display and the decorative design or the normal design displayed as the variable display result may be different.

It should be noted that in the above-described embodiment, the ratio (including the determined ratio, etc., and the same applies to the probability) may include 0%. That is, the ratio and the probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, making one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, and the other ratio is, for example, 0% and the other ratio is 10%. Including that. Further, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio does not have to be 100% (there may be one that is not included in either one or the other, and may have a predetermined ratio). Further, in the case where the ratio of the other is higher than that of the one, it includes setting one ratio to 0% and the other ratio to 100%. For example, in the above, making the determination rate of the variable display pattern in the specific period after the advantageous state different from the determination rate of the variable display pattern in the period other than the specific period means that the variable display pattern selected on the one hand is selected on the other hand. It also includes the case that the variable display pattern selected on the one hand and the variable display pattern selected on the other hand partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be defined by the contents of the table defining the ratio.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the one that performs the probability variation control in which the jackpot type is “probability variation” when the jackpot pattern indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, for example, a game area. It is also possible to use a probability variation determination device type pachinko gaming machine in which probability variation control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area within the attacker provided in.

In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications are possible within the range not specified. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to the detection of winning balls, but encloses the gaming balls and responds to the detection of winning balls. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives points, or a game machine that controls a big hit game state when a specific passage gate is passed. Further, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value (medal etc.), and a plurality of types of identification information that can be respectively identified can be variably displayed. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving the display result on the variable display device, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived on the variable display device.

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed/provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device included in. Furthermore, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, a hardware resource on the side of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like may be directly used. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machine 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main Board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Ordinary symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Starting opening switch 23 Count switch 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 random number circuit 105, 125 I/O
120 CPU for production control
123 Display control unit 901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Frame for game machine 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 game Effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal pattern display 9021 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 , 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 105, 125 I/O
90120 Production control CPU
90123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled in an advantageous state,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display regarding variable display,
By causing an effect image to act on the specific display, an effect effect executing means capable of executing an effect effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Special display means for performing a special display capable of changing the display mode step by step according to the degree of advantage,
Special notification executing means capable of executing a special notification for notifying information about a game,
It said working effect execution unit, in accordance with the display position of the a working effect of execution target the specific display, from among the starting position of the working effect that there exist a plurality of display of the specific display on which to perform the action effect Set it so that it is more likely to be far from the position closer to the position ,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period has elapsed after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed,
The special notification executing means also Ru executable der the special notification in a predetermined period subsequent to said special display of the display mode is changed is notified,
A gaming machine characterized by that.